JP7120293B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting device enters a special starting means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not a winning state should be generated, and the result of the lottery is displayed on a variable display device. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Also, in general, pachinko machines are equipped with a variable ball entry mechanism that changes between an open state in which a game ball can or is easily entered and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. A device is provided .

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110

By the way, it is desired to enter a game ball into the variable ball entering device more efficiently.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently entering a game ball into a variable ball entering device. .

The gaming machine of the present invention is
a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
A ball entry means that changes between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter,
The ball entry means
a specific prize winning opening into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific winning hole;
A closed position in which entry of a game ball into the specific winning opening is disabled and the ball entry means is in the closed state; a shutter that can be displaced between the open position and the open state,
A specific ball entry route is provided for guiding game balls moving in the game area to the specific winning opening,
When a game ball moving in the game area enters the entrance of the specific ball entry route, the game ball is guided to the ball entry means,
When the shutter is in the closed position when the game ball reaches the ball entry means, the shutter in the closed position restricts the game ball from entering the specific winning hole, A game ball is guided to the exit side of the specific ball entry route by the shutter in the closed position,
When the shutter is in the open position when the game ball reaches the ball entry means, and the game ball is guided to the exit side of the specific ball entry route by the shutter in the closed position. When the shutter is set to the open position in the state, the game ball enters the specific winning hole,
When the shutter is not set to the open position in a state where the game ball is guided to the exit side of the specific ball entry route by the shutter in the closed position, the game ball does not reach the exit of the specific ball entry route. discharged from
The shutter is configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position by being displaced in the front-rear direction. When the shutter is at the open position, the game ball guided to the exit side of the specific ball entry route by the upper surface of the shutter is displaced downward and enters the specific winning opening. is a ball configuration,
The shutter
The game ball enters the entrance of the specific ball entry route and is configured to be able to guide the game ball in a direction away from the exit of the specific ball entry route according to the direction of movement of the game ball that has reached the ball entry means. 1 counterpart;
a second corresponding portion that guides the game ball that has moved through the first corresponding portion and guides the game ball to the exit side of the specific ball entry route;
At least part of the first corresponding portion overlaps the second corresponding portion.

According to the present invention, a game ball can be efficiently entered into the variable ball entering device .

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, the game board, and the like. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. 9 is a flowchart showing first type determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing second type determination processing; It is a flowchart which shows a reach determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination|determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variable prize winning device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing end setting processing; 8 is a flowchart showing normal display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows a start winning a prize device control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of various counters used for determination of a decorative design. 10 is a flowchart showing counter update processing; It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information storage process. It is a flow chart which shows suspension processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit display processing. It is a perspective view of a second startup winning device. It is a perspective view of a second startup winning device. It is a cross-sectional view of the second start-up winning device. It is a front view which shows the structure, such as an inner frame and a game board, in 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing, such as a 2nd variable winning device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 2nd starting winning device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a plane schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus as a modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd starting winning device as a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a plane schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus as a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a cross-sectional view showing a second starting winning device in the fourth embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning device of 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning device of 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning device of 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning device of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 47 showing the second start-up winning device of the fourth embodiment; It is a sectional view of the 2nd starting prize-winning device of a 4th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view (front side) of the 2nd starting winning device in 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view (rear surface side) of the 2nd start-up winning device in 4th Embodiment. As a modification of the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view including a partial cross section for explaining the shape of the upper surface of the shutter, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a second variable winning device and the like. . It is a front view which shows a 2nd variable winning device etc. as a modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows a 2nd variable winning device etc. as a modification of 2nd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. An inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. . For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 omits the nails and accessories provided on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of wooden plate material, and a left frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. Note that the front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly supported by the outer frame 11 instead of via the inner frame 12 so as to be openable.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 is provided as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion thereof. can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect is performed on the decorative pattern display device 42, etc., which will be described later. Or the content of the production is changed.

A game ball shooting handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15 and protrudes forward. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting an operation amount of an operation portion of the handle 18 . Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is shot by a shooting device 60 as a shooting means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Also, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. As shown in FIG. When the shooting prohibition button 18a is pressed, shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is gripped. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of the game ball, or temporarily stop shooting the game ball while gripping the handle 18.例文帳に追加

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper plate 19 is a ball receiver that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 to be described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16, which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 are provided on the upper plate 19. - 特許庁As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Furthermore, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123 . By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light emitting means play a role of increasing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode in accordance with the change of the game state or the like. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the ring-shaped decorative portion 102 to light up in the event of a predetermined error. A large number of fine through-holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above each error display lamp 104 corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 is not a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39 . Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 .

In addition, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the front lower portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39. there is In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60 . Furthermore, above the shooting device 60, a ball feeding device guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving a built-in drive means (eg, solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a first variable winning device 32a, a second variable winning device 32b, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a A first special display device 43L, a second special display device 43R, a change specific lamp 40, and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, variable winning devices 32a, 32B, starting winning devices 33a, 33B, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and is detected by the upper tray 19 or the lower tray. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, 10 balls enter the general winning hole 31, 14 balls enter the first variable winning device 32a, and 14 balls enter the second variable winning device 32b. 13 if there are balls, 2 if there is a ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, and 1 if there is a ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. is configured to be paid out. Also, even if a game ball passes through a through gate 34 that does not enter the game ball (discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out. In this embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b constitutes variable winning means, the second starting winning device 33b constitutes special starting means, and the through gate 34 constitutes normal starting means.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowest part of the game area, and game balls that do not win various prize winning ports such as the general winning port 31 exit this out port 36. It passes through and is discharged outside the game area. The game board 30 is also provided with a large number of nails for appropriately distributing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged in substantially the center of the game area. A center frame 47 is arranged in the variable display device unit 35 so as to surround a decorative design display device 42 which will be described later.

A ball entrance 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and a game ball that enters the ball entrance 151 passes through a warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47 and passes through a decorative pattern. It is guided onto a stage 153 formed below the display device 42 . The game ball guided onto the stage 153 rolls on the stage 153, and falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends back and forth formed in the center of the stage 153 and hits the game ball. It may drop into the lead-out groove 154 that guides forward.

Below the variable display device unit 35, a first starting winning device 33a is arranged. The first starting prize winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and has a prize winning port open above which game balls can always win prizes. In particular, the game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first start winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. The first start-up winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening/closing member that changes the ease with which a game ball enters the first start-up winning device 33a.

A first variable winning device 32a is arranged below the first start-up winning device 33a. The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize, and is in an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in the event of a jackpot state of the corresponding type. Although not shown, the first variable winning device 32a includes a big winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a big winning shutter for opening and closing the big winning opening, and a big winning shutter for operating the big winning shutter. Equipped with an opening solenoid and a first count switch 223a for detecting a game ball entering the big winning opening, the first variable winning device controls driving of the big winning opening solenoid to open and close the big winning shutter. 32a (big prize winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

Hereinafter, for convenience, the area located on the left side of the variable display unit 35 will be referred to as the "left area", and the area located on the right side of the variable display unit 35 will be referred to as the "right area". In addition, the area located downstream of the left side area and to the left of the substantially central portion in the horizontal direction of the game board 30 where the first start-up winning device 33a and the first variable winning device 32a are arranged is referred to as the "lower left area". In other words, the area located downstream of the right side area and located on the right side of the substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the game board 30 is referred to as the "lower right area".

In the lower part of the lower left area, three general winning openings 31 are arranged obliquely at predetermined intervals along the periphery of the game area (the inner rail forming portion 51). Each general prize winning port 31 protrudes forward from the front part of the game board 30, and a prize winning port in which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof.

A through gate 34 is arranged in the right region. The through gate 34 is configured so that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. The through gate 34 has a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, which will be described later in detail. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery is performed as to whether or not the second starting prize winning device 33b, which will be described later in detail, is opened, and the normal symbol display device 41 A variable display is performed to teach the result of the entry support lottery. Then, when winning the ball-entering support lottery, the second starting prize-winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

Furthermore, a second variable winning device 32b is arranged downstream of the through gate 34 in the right side area. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize, and is in an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in the case of a jackpot state of the corresponding type. Although not shown, the second variable winning device 32b includes a big winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a big winning shutter for opening and closing the big winning opening, and a big winning shutter for operating the big winning shutter. Equipped with an opening solenoid and a second count switch 223b for detecting a game ball entering the big winning opening, the second variable winning device controls driving of the big winning opening solenoid and opens and closes the big winning shutter. 32b (large prize winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

Incidentally, the first and second variable prize winning devices 32a and 32b of the present embodiment are pivotally supported along the lower edge of the big winning opening so that the lower edge of the big winning shutter is rotatable along the lower edge of the big winning opening. , When the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are closed, the big winning shutter extends vertically to close the big winning opening, and a game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, when the first and second variable prize winning devices 32a and 32b are open, the big prize winning shutter rotates forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is slightly downwardly slanted toward the rear), opening the big prize winning opening. A game ball flowing forward is received by the rear surface (upper surface) of the big winning shutter and guided to the big winning opening.

A second start-up winning device 33b is arranged downstream of the second variable winning device 32b in the lower right region. The second start winning device 33b is also configured to be changeable between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter. Details of the second starting prize winning device 33b will be described later.

Although details will be described later, the first start-up winning device 33a and the second start-up winning device 33b are provided with a first start-up winning switch 224a and a second start-up winning switch 224b for detecting a winning game ball, respectively. , When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, a winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, etc., and special display devices 43L, 43R (and decorative pattern display A device 42) is configured to perform a variable display. Then, when winning the lottery, a big hit state or the like in which the first variable prize winning device 32a or the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened is provided.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in a lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the lottery. Further, although details will be described later, the second start winning device 33b is provided with a start winning shutter 405 as an opening and closing member for opening and closing the second start winning device 33b (start winning port 402 described later). In the form, the starting winning shutter 405 is opened relatively frequently, and the game ball is easily entered into the second starting winning device 33b in a "high ball entry state", and the starting winning shutter 405 is hardly opened. , there is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting prize winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the state of low probability and low ball entry state will be referred to as "normal mode", and the state of low probability and high ball entry state will be referred to as "time reduction mode". A certain state is called "probability variable mode", and a state of high probability and low ball entry state is called "potential probability mode".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the normal mode, the variable probability mode, and the latent probability mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the special display device 43L, even if the jackpot state does not occur. 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42 are configured to end when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, and shift to the normal mode.

In addition, in the probability variable mode and the time reduction mode, the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently to make it easier to enter, while the first start winning device 33a Therefore, when the player enters the variable probability mode or the time shortening mode, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side area (so-called "right hitting"). In addition, at the timing of right-handed hitting, an announcement prompting right-handed hitting is made on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting winning device 33a (so-called "navel") is won in the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters, and the second starting winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip , Electric Chew"), the type of hit given changes depending on whether it is won in the winning lottery that is held when the game ball enters different tables).

More specifically, the types of jackpots in the case of winning the jackpot state based on the ball entering the first start prize winning device 33a are 16 rounds variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "16RS") and 8 rounds variable jackpot ( hereinafter referred to as "8RS"), an 8-round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "8RN"), and a 2-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "2RS"). Regarding "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN", the first variable prize winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable prize winning device 32a is opened and the first variable prize winning device 32a has 8 Assuming that a game ball enters as one round, ``16RS'' is repeated 16 times, and ``8RS'' and ``8RN'' are repeated 8 times, after which the jackpot state ends. . On the other hand, with respect to "2RS", one round consists of opening the first variable prize winning device 32a for 0.4 seconds, and after this is repeated twice, the jackpot state ends. That is, although "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN" are jackpots in which a large increase in the number of game balls can be expected during the jackpot state (so-called "jackpot with ball output"), "2RS" is a game ball. It is a jackpot (so-called “no ball jackpot”) that cannot be expected to increase significantly.

In addition, after the jackpot state of ``16RS'' and ``8RS'' ends, a ``probability variable mode'' is given, after the jackpot state of ``2RS'' ends, a ``potential probability mode'' is given, and after the jackpot state of ``8RN'' ends. A "time reduction mode" (in this example, 90 times of variable display) is provided. In other words, after the jackpot state of "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN" is completed, the second starting prize winning device 33b is likely to be in the open state, so that the player moves toward the right side area and plays the game. A ball will be launched. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, the rate is "16RS" at a rate of 5%, "8RS" at a rate of 55%, and "8RS" at a rate of 30%. becomes "8RN" at a rate of 10%, and becomes "2RS" at a rate of 10%.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a small win is won in a winning lottery based on the entry of a ball into the first starting prize winning device 33a. In the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, when a small hit is made, the first variable prize winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, which is repeated twice. , the small winning state ends. That is, regarding the first variable winning device 32a, the appearance is the same as "2RS". However, the game mode does not change between before and after the occurrence of the small winning state. In other words, when "2RS" is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the probability mode, but even if a small win is won, the normal mode is continued. As a result, in the lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, the first variable prize winning is not performed such that a two-round jackpot (two-round normal jackpot) to which a high probability state is not awarded is won. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the apparatus 32a is opened twice in a short period of time, inevitably resulting in a transition to a high-probability state.

On the other hand, the types of jackpots in the case of winning the jackpot state based on the ball entering the second start prize winning device 33b are: 16-round variable variable jackpot, 8-round variable variable jackpot, and 2-round normal jackpot (hereinafter “2RN”). say). In addition, in the case of winning the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened instead of the first variable prize winning device 32a (in this example, the round ends). Although the conditions are the same, the number of payouts (14 and 13) when game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are different), but for convenience of explanation, the second starting winning device 33b For convenience, the same names (“16RS” and “8RS”) will be used for the types of jackpots in the case of winning a lottery based on the number of balls entered. In addition, in the present embodiment, the condition for ending the round in the jackpot state in which the first variable prize winning device 32a is open is the same as the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is in the open state. There is one (eight wins, or one round after 30 seconds have passed), but it may be different (for example, the upper limit of wins for game balls during a round is 8 and 9).

In addition, regarding "2RS", one round is defined as opening the second variable winning device 32b for 0.4 seconds, and after that is repeated twice, the jackpot state ends. In other words, with respect to "16RS" and "8RS", a large increase in the number of game balls can be expected during the big win state, but "2RN" is a big win in which a large increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected.

Also, after the end of the "2RN" jackpot state, a "time reduction mode" is provided. In this example, "2RN" is also divided into three, "2RN30" to which the time reduction mode for 30 variable displays is provided, "2RN60" to which the time reduction mode for 60 variable displays is provided, and variable There is "2RN90" which gives a time reduction mode for 90 displays. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, the rate is "16RS" at a rate of 35%, "8RS" at a rate of 35%, and "8RS" at a rate of 20%. becomes "2RN30" at a rate of 5%, "2RN60" at a rate of 5%, and "2RN90" at a rate of 5%.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a small win is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. In the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, when a small hit is made, the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, which is repeated twice. , the small winning state ends. That is, regarding the second variable winning device 32b, the appearance is the same as "2RN". However, the game mode does not change between before and after the occurrence of the small winning state. That is, high-probability state such as probability mode basically shifts to a low-probability state (time reduction mode, etc.) by winning "2RN", but even if you win a small hit in probability mode, Mode continues. As a result, the second variable winning device 32b is opened twice for a short period of time without performing a sorting to win the 2nd round probability variable jackpot "2RS" in the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is known that the state has shifted to the low probability state without fail.

In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, and the second teaching the result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b The 2 special display devices 43R are composed of two segment display devices, respectively, and are configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are placed at positions visible to the player (in this example, a position below the second variable winning device 32b and on the right side of the second starting winning device 33b where game balls cannot pass). is set up.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting prize winning device 33a, the first special display device 43L performs switching display (variable display) of the special symbol, and the game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b. Triggered by the entry of a ball, the second special display device 43R is configured to perform switching display (variable display) of special symbols. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means, which will be described later.

In addition, after the variable display of the special symbols is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the lottery, that is, "jackpot", " It is definitely displayed that it is a "minor win" or "loss". For example, when a game ball enters the first starting prize winning device 33a, the special pattern (combination of segments to be lit) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variable display). ), and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, for example, when a "big win" is won in the winning lottery, the corresponding special symbols are displayed when the variation is stopped, and a big win state occurs.

Furthermore, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, the type of the jackpot, that is, any of "16RS", "8RS", "8RN", "2RS" and "2RN" is taught by the special symbols to be stopped. be. Moreover, there are not one but a plurality of stopping modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R for teaching one jackpot type, and one of them is selected and stopped. In addition, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R performs the variable display or the determined display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed). may be set), and if neither the variable display nor the fixed display is performed, "-" is displayed in both.

In addition, when a game ball newly enters the first or second start winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display for that It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display that is being performed at the time. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. Up to four variable displays (a total of eight variable displays) are reserved for each game ball.

Furthermore, the pending number of the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter referred to as "first variable display") is arranged above the first special display device 43L and is displayed in blue. The number of holdings of the variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second variable display") based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b is lit by the first holding lamp 46a that can emit light. 2, which is arranged above the special display device 43R and is illuminated by a second holding lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided with four each, which is the same as the maximum holding number of the first variable display and the second variable display. Light. Display contents of the holding lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub-control device 262 as a sub-control means to be described later. In addition, when the game ball newly wins the starting winning units 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of suspensions of variable display based on the entry of game balls into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (when the variable display is performed, the screen displayed at the bottom).

It should be noted that the suspended variable displays are basically digested in the order they were suspended, but if both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended (hold lamp 46b are lit by one or more), the second variable display is preferentially extinguished. That is, unless the second variable display triggered by the winning of the second starting prize-winning device 33b is completely extinguished, the first variable display triggered by the winning of the ball to the first starting prize-winning device 33a is performed. There is no configuration. For example, in a state in which one first holding lamp 46a is lit, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one second holding lamp 46b is lit, the first variable display is postponed and the second variable display is performed first.

The variable specific lamp 40 indicates which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b the variable display performed by the decorative pattern display device 42 corresponds to (the second start winning device 33b). 1 variable display or second variable display), and is arranged at a position visible to the player (in this example, above the stage 153 of the center frame 47). The variation specific lamp 40 includes an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red. It emits red light when displaying.

The variable display device unit 35 has a normal pattern display device 41 (located above the stage 153 in the center frame 47) that is variably displayed when the through gate 34 is passed, and variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. A decorative pattern display device 42 is provided to variably display according to the time.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "○" or "X" as a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol is changed from "○" to "X". →“○”→・・・and switch display (variation display) at high speed. Then, when the variable display stops for a few seconds at the "O" symbol (winning symbol), the second starting winning device 33b (starting winning shutter 405) is opened for a predetermined time. Display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 which will be described later.

Further, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount is performed after the end of the variable display being performed at that time. It is configured to be done. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times of variable display of normal symbols to be suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model, but is suspended up to four times in this embodiment. In addition, the number of suspensions of variable display of normal symbols is arranged in the variable display device unit 35, and is illuminated by a suspension lamp 44 capable of emitting white light. The suspension lamps 44 are provided with four each, which is the same as the maximum number of suspensions of the variation display of normal symbols, and are lit by the same number as the number of suspension variation displays.

In addition, as a high ball entry state, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, (2) a single opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second starting prize winning device 33b is greater than in the low ball entry state; (4) A state in which the number of times the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball-entering support lottery is greater than in the low-ball-entering state; It is also possible to raise the level of The high ball entry state in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, without being limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, the game balls are likely to frequently win prizes in the second starting prize winning device 33b, the number of times the winning lottery is executed increases, and the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state. .

The decorative pattern display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to variably display decorative patterns as identification information. The display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, based on the command from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 assists so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is provided with, for example, three pattern display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, number patterns with numbers 1 to 9) are displayed in each pattern display area. The decorative symbols are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and thereafter, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display area→lower symbol display area→middle symbol display area). . For example, when the main controller 261 confirms the occurrence of the big win, the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R display corresponding to the big win, and the decorative pattern display device 42 shows the big win. (For example, the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are arranged so that the same decorative symbols are lined up on a predetermined effective line. ) and the jackpot state is started.

Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the big hit, as a preliminary step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-win state. Of course, the occurrence of the reach state does not necessarily mean that the jackpot will be won, and there are cases where the win is lost.

In this embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol (ready-to-win symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same active line. When it is done (when double eyes are displayed stopped), a jackpot state is given. In addition, in the case of an odd number of cohorts, "16RS" or "8RS" is generated, and in the case of an even number of cohorts, either "16RS", "8RS" or "8RN" is generated.

The combination of decorative patterns other than doublet basically teaches "missing", but in this embodiment, even if the big hit is "2RS", "2RN", the decorative patterns are doublets. It is not stopped by the combination, but is stopped by the combination in which the ready-to-win symbols are not displayed. In addition, the "minor win" is also stop-displayed with a combination of the ready-to-win symbols but the missing symbols.

For example, in the variable probability mode, a dedicated variable probability stage is displayed in the decorative pattern display device 42 as an effect corresponding to the game mode (indicating the game mode in which the player is staying). When the mode ends, or when a "small hit" is won, the variable probability stage ends, and a pullback stage is displayed in which it is not possible to determine whether the variable probability mode is selected. Then, if "2RN" is won and the period of the given time reduction mode ends, the pullback stage ends and the normal mode indicating that it is the normal mode (very likely) Start showing the stage. Further, when the "small hit" is won, the game mode remains in the variable probability mode since there is no change in the game mode before and after the "small hit". Therefore, although it shifts to the pullback stage, it is easy to win big, and furthermore, when the period corresponding to the maximum of the time reduction mode (90 times of variable display of special symbols) is exceeded, it is grasped that it is a probability variable mode. be able to.

In addition, as described above, the correspondence relationship between the special symbol stop mode and the big win type in the special display devices 43L and 43R is grasped, and the stop mode of the special symbol variation display indicating the occurrence of the big win or small win is confirmed. If so, it is possible to determine which type of jackpot has been won. In addition, "16RS" and "8RS" are the types of jackpots to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery performed based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. I have to. For this reason, basically (except when the variable display corresponding to the ball entering the first start winning device 33a that has been suspended) is extinguished) in the decorative design display device 42 in the variable probability mode or the time reduction mode When the jackpot teaching is performed, provision of the variable probability mode is determined.

Also, for example, in the normal mode, as an effect corresponding to the game mode, the normal stage is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, but when "2RS" is won and the mode is shifted to the probability variable mode, or the "small win ”, the normal stage ends, and a precursor stage is displayed in which it is not possible to determine whether the variable probability mode is selected. In this embodiment, when the "small hit" is the transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the normal mode, this sign stage is a period of about 10 to 50 times with a variable display of special symbols. After being derived in , it returns to the normal stage. On the other hand, when "2RS" is the transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the latent probability mode, basically it is a premonition stage until a big hit. In addition, a lottery may be conducted to determine whether to return to the normal stage from the omen stage, or after returning from the omen stage to the normal stage, a lottery may be drawn to determine whether to move to the omen stage again (in latent mode, , it is desirable to increase the probability of returning to the precursor stage). In addition, when "8RN" is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, and "8RS" is won, the variable probability mode is given until the end of the jackpot state. If it is not instructed, after the jackpot state ends, the stage shifts to the pullback stage.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail forming part 51 and an outer rail forming part 52 and guides the game ball shot from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 . As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . A game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming part 52 ends at the upper right part of the game board 30 and the inner rail forming part 51 ends at the lower right part of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, since the game ball hit by the shooting device 60 may flow backward on the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. be killed.

Now, this embodiment is characterized by the second starting prize winning device 33b. 38 to 40, etc., the second starting prize winning device 33b will be mainly described below. The second starting prize winning device 33b is a box having a base plate 401 attached along the front surface of the game board 30, and a starting prize opening 402 protruding from the front side of the base plate 401 and opening upward. A winning box 403 shaped like a winning box 403, a second starting winning switch 224b (see FIG. 40) for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 402, and a closing switch 224b (see FIG. 40) that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the starting winning opening 402. A starting prize winning shutter 405 that can be displaced between a position and an open position that enables ball entry, a solenoid (not shown) that operates the starting prize winning shutter 405, and guides the game ball toward the starting prize winning port 402 side. A guide table 407 is provided. In this embodiment, the starting winning opening 402 corresponds to the specific winning opening, and the opening/closing member is constituted by the starting winning shutter 405 and the solenoid or the like for operating the starting winning shutter 405 .

The starting prize winning shutter 405 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and enters the game area through an opening (hereinafter referred to as "receiving opening 408") formed in the base plate 401 directly above the starting prize winning port 402. , and opens and closes the start winning opening 402.例文帳に追加As shown in FIG. 39, in the open state of the second starting winning device 33b, the entire starting winning shutter 405 is housed in the inner side of the housing opening 408, and as shown in FIG. In the closed state of 33b, the entire starting winning opening 402 is covered by the starting winning shutter 405. As shown in FIG. Further, the starting winning shutter 405 closing the starting winning opening 402 is supported by the peripheral edge of the starting winning opening 402 at both side edges and the front edge of the lower surface thereof. In this embodiment, the peripheral portion of the starting winning opening 402 that supports the lower surface of the starting winning shutter 405 constitutes the receiving member. In addition, a reinforcing rib 409 is formed on the bottom side of the starting winning shutter 405 .

The guide table 407 is arranged on the upper right side of the starting winning opening 402, and guides the game ball that has reached the second starting winning device 33b from the upstream side of the game area from a substantially constant direction to the starting winning opening 402 in this example. It is provided to guide you from the top right. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the second start-up prize-winning device 33b is driven by various game members such as game nails disposed above the second start-up prize-winning device 33b and accessories for decoration. The movement route of the game ball is limited so that the game ball that has reached the point must enter the guide table 407 first. In other words, the game ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b (with the possibility of entering the starting prize winning port 402) always jumps out from the guide table 407 toward the upper position of the starting prize winning shutter 405 located at the lower left. It is designed to work. In this embodiment, the position at which the game ball is guided by the guide table 407 and jumps out corresponds to the specific point, and the starting winning shutter 405 is arranged at the specific point.

Furthermore, the various game members that guide the game ball to the guide table 407 are configured so that the force of the game ball reaching the guide table 407 is suppressed as much as possible (for example, the guide surface is not steep but has a gentle slope close to the horizontal direction). etc.). As a result, the speed and launch angle of the game ball guided by the guide table 407 are approximated as much as possible. In this embodiment, the guide table 407 and the game nails, decorative accessories, etc. for guiding the game balls to the guide table 407 constitute the rectifying means.

Between the winning box 403 and the guide table 407, an opening through which game balls can pass (hereinafter referred to as "discharge opening 411") is provided. In other words, game balls that do not enter the start winning opening 402 are discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33b through the discharge opening 411. FIG.

Now, on the upper surface side of the winning box 403, adjacent to the left side of the start winning opening 402, there is formed an introduction path 412 for guiding the game ball backward (back side of the game board 30). That is, when the starting winning opening 402 is closed by the starting winning opening shutter 405 (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed position), the guide table 407 guides the game from the upper right side to the starting winning opening 402 side. The starting winning shutter 405 restricts the ball from entering the starting winning opening 402, and the momentum guided from the guide table 407 passes over the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405 and adjoins the left side of the starting winning shutter 405. It will enter into the introduction path 412 to which it carries out.

The upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405 and the lead-in path 412 of this embodiment are inclined downward to the right side, but the game ball guided from the guide table 407 is guided so as to run up these and move. The inclination, length, relative position, etc. of the table 407 are designed.

Further, the base plate 401 is formed with an opening communicating with the introduction path 412 (hereinafter referred to as a "detour opening 413"). A detour opening 413 is formed between the introduction path 412 and the left portion of the start winning opening 402 .

Further, on the rear side of the base plate 401, a turn box 415 having a re-entry path 414 for releasing the game balls that have entered the detour opening 413 from the lead-in path 412 above the start winning opening 402 is attached. ing. The re-entry path 414 is composed of an outward path 416 on the left side and a return path 417 on the right side with the lateral center of the turn box 415 as a boundary. Although the rear ends of the outward path 416 and the return path 417 are continuous, a screen rib 418 is formed in the forward portion so as to prevent movement between the outward path 416 and the return path 417 . The outbound path 416 is continuous with the introduction path 412 through the detour opening 413 and is inclined rearward and rightward. The return path 417 is continuous with the rear portion of the outward path 416, is connected to the detour opening 413 positioned directly above the starting prize-winning opening 402, and is inclined forward.

When the flow of the game ball in the second starting prize winning device 33b is confirmed, first, when the game ball that is guided by the guide table 407 and jumps out to the starting prize winning port 402 side reaches just above the starting prize winning port 402 When the starting prize winning port 402 is open, the game ball jumps into the opened starting prize winning port 402 and wins, and is detected by the second starting prize winning switch 224b.

On the other hand, when the game ball that is guided by the guide table 407 and jumps out to the start winning opening 402 reaches just above the starting winning opening 402, the starting winning opening 402 is closed by the starting winning opening shutter 405. 2, when such a game ball lands on the upper surface of the starting prize-winning shutter 405, it moves to the left as it is and enters the lead-in path 412. - 特許庁Furthermore, it jumps out again from the lead-in path 412 via the re-entry path 414 above the starting prize-winning opening 402 . At this time, if the starting winning opening 402 is open, the starting winning opening 402 is won, and on the other hand, if the starting winning opening 402 is closed by the starting winning opening shutter 405, the upper surface of the starting winning opening shutter 405 It is guided downward to the right and discharged from the discharge opening 411 to the outside of the second starting prize winning device 33b.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is in an almost open state (the start winning opening 402 is almost opened) in the high ball winning state of the variable probability mode and the time shortening mode. ing). For example, in a high-ball state, the probability of winning the ball-entry support lottery is 99/100, the variable display time of the normal pattern that displays the ball-entry support lottery result is 0.4 seconds, and when the ball-entry support lottery is won , opening for 4 seconds is repeated three times with intervening closing periods of 0.4 seconds. For this reason, even if the starting winning opening 402 is closed by chance when it jumps out of the guide table 407 and is positioned directly above the starting winning opening 402, the starting winning opening 402 passes through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 to re-start the winning opening. When reaching directly above 402, there is a very high possibility that the start winning opening 402 is open. In this embodiment, the time from jumping out of the guide table 407 to above the starting prize winning opening 402 via the upper surface of the starting prize winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414 is approximately 1 second. It is assumed to be ~2 seconds.

Furthermore, even if a predetermined game ball attempts to enter the starting winning opening 402 for the second time, even if the starting winning opening shutter 405 is closed and the starting winning opening 402 cannot win, the game ball is started. If it is on the upper surface of the winning shutter 405 , the ball will enter the starting winning hole 402 . In particular, in this embodiment, the return path 417 of the re-entry path 414 is located at the left side, which is the upstream side, of the upper surface of the start-up winning shutter 405 that slopes downward toward the right discharge opening 411. It is connected to the left part of the start winning opening 402 that becomes. Therefore, when the game ball jumps out from the re-entry path 414 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 and the starting winning winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball is kept for a relatively long time (starting winning shutter It is configured to stay on the starting prize winning shutter 405 by rolling a distance as long as possible from the left side to the right side of the upper surface of 405 .

Therefore, in the high ball winning state, when hitting to the right, almost all game balls enter the starting winning hole 402 of the second starting winning device 33b. As a result, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second start prize winning device 33b (when the game ball is detected by the second start prize winning switch 224b) is one. However, the player can enjoy the variable probability mode and the time reduction mode without reducing the number of game balls held by the player. In addition, since the suspension of the variable display of the special symbols is almost never interrupted, the game can be progressed with a sense of humor.

On the other hand, in the low ball state, the probability of winning the ball support lottery is 1/100, the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is 8 seconds, and when the ball ball support lottery is won, the opening for 0.4 seconds is 1. done only once. Therefore, even if the player hits right in the normal mode or the latent probability mode, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the second starting prize winning device 33b and receive the winning lottery. Therefore, in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, the game ball is shot with a shooting strength that makes the game ball flow in the "left side area" on the left side of the variable display unit 35 for the purpose of entering the first start winning device 33a. will be fired (“left-handed”). Incidentally, in this embodiment, when a game ball is “left-handed”, the game ball cannot enter the second variable winning device 32b and the second starting winning device 33b. 34 cannot pass through. Furthermore, when the game ball is "right-handed", the game ball cannot enter the first variable winning device 32a and the first starting winning device 33a.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, the second start-up winning device 33b is provided downstream of the second variable winning device 32b in the game area. In addition, in this embodiment, when the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, almost all the game balls moving in the right side area are blocked by the shutter of the second variable winning device 32b, and the second variable winning device 32b A prize is awarded to the device 32b. Therefore, during the round of the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is open, the game balls hardly flow to the second starting winning device 33b side.

In this embodiment, the starting winning shutter 405, the lead-in path 412, and the re-entry path 414 constitute the time-lag passing opportunity providing means. Also, the ball entry support lottery corresponds to the open/close lottery, the first state corresponds to the low ball entry state, and the second state corresponds to the high ball entry state. Further, the function of the main controller 261, which will be described later in detail, to perform a ball-entering support lottery constitutes the opening/closing lottery means.

As shown in FIG. 3 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 . In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加As a result, if a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return-ball prevention member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. Ejected.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12. The upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, and nearly closes the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower tray communication passage 71 . The inlets (ball inlets) of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 are adjacent to each other, and the inlets and the dispensing path 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed, A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and the lower tray connection It will be dispensed to the lower tray 15 through the passage 71 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to. In this embodiment, based on the detection of game balls continuously for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch, an error notification is provided to teach that the lower tray 15 is full by using the display or sound on the decorative pattern display device 42. is controlled. In addition, when the retention of the game ball in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to protrude rearward. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 can be attached and detached in a stacked state. attached to the

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the rear surface of the frame cover 213. fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). An LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213 . The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning unit 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have entered various winning slots. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 in which a main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches for detecting game balls that have entered the various prize winning openings corresponding to the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b have a first count switch. 223a and a second count switch 223b are provided. Further, the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b are provided with a first start prize winning switch 224a and a second start prize winning switch 224b. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34 .

In addition, although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes a winning opening switch 221, a first count switch 223a, a second count switch 223b, and a through gate switch 225, which are electrically connected via cable connectors. One board surface relay board is provided. This first board surface relay board relays the winning slot switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start-up prize switch 224a and the second start-up prize switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various incoming ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although not shown, on the rear surface of the game board 30, a solenoid for opening a large winning opening is provided with a first variable winning device 32a and a second variable winning device 32b. A winning opening solenoid for opening and closing the starting winning shutter 405 is provided in the starting winning device 33b. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main controller 261 .

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various kinds of information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, variable probability mode, etc.), the front frame set 14 and the inner frame detected by the open detection switches 91 and 92 described later A terminal for outputting information about the opening of 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, tank no ball error, payout error, prize paid out from payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information about the number of balls is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and is gently inclined toward the downstream side. Concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the prize-winning openings such as the general prize-winning opening 31 are collected via the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 . Incidentally, the out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are detachable in a state of being superimposed on each other. attached to the

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the payout control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261 so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 has a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in , an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A main controller 261 (main substrate) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. FIG. On the other hand, the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262 .

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes various switches such as the winning port switch 221, the count switches 223a and 223b, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, the through gate switch 225, and the handle 18. Various detection switches, various substrates, and various electric parts such as solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). It has The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Further, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the hold lamps 46a and 46b, the performance button 125, various illumination parts and the lamps 102-104.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 are adapted to display that the jackpot has been won. In the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by , variable display (of decorative patterns) is performed as effect display in accordance with the variable display of (the special patterns in) the special display devices 43L and 43R.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibition button 18a ( 1) is not operated, the shooting device 60 is driven, and game balls are shot with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. FIG.

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-controller 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the output port 529 is connected to the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521. A work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative design display device 42. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative design display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as designs displayed on the decorative design display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 of the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a success or failure random number counter C1 used for a success or failure lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, a type determination counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot (type lottery), and a decoration A variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win state in the symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1, and first and second special display devices. 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) 1st variation type counter CS1, 2nd variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time, etc., and used for lottery (entrance support lottery) of normal design display device 41 A normal symbol random number counter C4 is used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for lottery for the reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device . Specifically, according to the determined variation pattern, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative design display device 42, that is, the performance pattern is determined.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 stores the values of the success/failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3, as a special variation reservation area as a reservation storage area, and the normal pattern random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variable holding area comprises one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored chronologically according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

In addition, the special variation reservation area includes a first special variation reservation area and a second special variation storage area each having four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area), and one execution area. In each reservation area of the first special variable reservation area, each value of the win/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first start winning device 33a. Stored sequentially. In each reservation area of the second special variable reservation area, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b. Stored sequentially. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display up to four times on each of the special display devices 43L and 43R.

To explain each counter in detail, the hit/fail random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599. It is configured to return to Normally, when the success/failure random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 599) similar to the success/failure random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer is stored in the special change holding area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is "7, 307", and the probability is high. In the state (probability variable mode, potential probability mode), the number of values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two success/fail determination tables that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 corresponds to a big win. There is a first right/wrong judgment table that stores values and a second right/wrong judgment table that stores "8 to 16, 308 to 316" as jackpot values.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a random number counter C1 is used to draw a lottery to determine whether or not a small win is won when a big win is not won. In the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), the number of values of the small hit random number counter C1 is 1, the value is "404", and the high probability state (variable probability mode, latent probability mode) ), the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, which is a small win, is 10, and the value is "404 to 413". Incidentally, for the determination of whether or not the small win is successful, the first small win determination table storing "404" as the winning value and the second small winning determination table storing "405 to 413" as the winning value are referred to.

In addition, in the normal mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery (big hit probability) is 1/300, the probability of winning a small hit (small hit probability) is 1/600, and the ball support lottery The variation time in the normal design display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and when winning in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is 0.4 seconds be released.

In the variable probability mode, the probability of a big win is 1/30 and the probability of a small win is 1/60, making it easier to make a big win or a small win than in the normal mode. In addition, in the variable probability mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entrance support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than in the normal mode, and when winning the entrance support lottery, the second The starting prize winning device 33b is opened three times, and each opening time is 4 seconds (the opening of 4 seconds is repeated three times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds in between). That is, in the variable probability mode, compared to the normal mode, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened, and the opening time of the second start winning device 33b per winning of the entrance support lottery is longer, and the number of times of opening is longer. will increase. As a result, the time zone in which the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state is lengthened, so that game balls frequently enter the second starting prize winning device 33b (become in a high ball winning state). , the winning lottery is continuously performed, and the state of keeping the ball is good. In addition, in the high ball entry state, the probability that the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery) may be set higher than in the normal mode.

In the time reduction mode, the big win probability is 1/300 and the small win probability is 1/600. In addition, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entrance support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and when winning the entrance support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened three times. and each open time is 4 seconds. That is, in the time shortening mode, the jackpot probability is as low as in the normal mode, but if only the operation of the second starting prize winning device 33b is seen, it is the same as the variable probability mode. In this embodiment, after the jackpot state of "8RN" or "2RN" is completed, the total number of fluctuations is displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (90 times after "8RN") Thus, the time reduction mode is set for "2RN" 30 times ("2RN30"), 60 times ("2RN60"), and 90 times ("2RN90"). Also, the time reduction mode ends when the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the variable display for the specified number of times even if the jackpot state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In the latent probability mode, the probability of a big win is 1/30 and the probability of a small win is 1/60. Further, in the latent probability mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 8 seconds, and when winning the ball-entering support lottery, the second starting prize winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. That is, in the latent probability mode, although the probability of the jackpot is as high as in the variable probability mode, only the operation of the second starting prize winning device 33b is the same as in the normal mode. In this embodiment, after the end of the "2RS" jackpot state, the latent certainty mode is entered, and continues at least until the jackpot state occurs. Incidentally, in this embodiment, if a winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a is won, there is no allocation to win "2RN", so the latent certainty mode ends quietly. Such a situation is avoided (continued until winning a jackpot with balls).

The type determining counter C2 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19). In addition, the ROM 502 includes a first type determination table (corresponding to the first start winning device 33a) that is referenced when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to, a second type determination A table (corresponding to the second start winning device 33b) is provided. Then, when a big win is won in the lottery, the type of the type of the jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (type lottery is performed), and the determined type of the jackpot state is determined. will be granted.

The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503. .

The variable selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238). In this embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs with respect to the decorative pattern, the final stop pattern shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win pattern by the variation selection counter C3 and stops, and the same ready-to-win state occurs. A lottery is drawn for "reach other than front and rear out" in which the rear final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol and "complete out" in which the reach state does not occur. In this embodiment, a reach determination table is provided in the ROM 502 to store the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. The reach determination table stores a value of "0 to 238", C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front and rear out reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to reach other than front and rear out, C3 = 22 to 238 is perfect It has a configuration that corresponds to the outside.

The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33b, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. .

Further, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 59), and then the lower limit. It is configured to return to 0, and the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 37, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 37), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough pattern variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the reach occurs. (In this example, the middle pattern), a more detailed pattern variation mode such as the elapsed time until the stop is determined. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

In addition, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. Buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining a variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42 .

Note that the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 99). The random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is obtained when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. Low input. The number of winning random number values in the ball state is 1, and the range is 1. On the other hand, the number of random number values winning in the high ball entry state is 99. The range is "1 to 99".And, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to winning ("○" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second start winning opening 473 is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

In addition, when there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are provided based on the prize ball command (game balls are paid out). ). Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

Also, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success or failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (599, 19 in this embodiment, respectively). , 238, 99) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step S304, starting winning processing accompanying winning to the starting winning unit 33 is executed, and in step S305, through gate passage processing accompanying passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is once terminated.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the RAM 503 includes a first suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions of variable display triggered by winning a prize in the first start prize winning device 33a, and suspension of variable display triggered by winning a prize in the second start prize winning device 33b. A second pending counter Nb is provided for counting.

In addition, in the execution area and each reservation area of the special variation reservation area, the success/failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, the winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 A reach random number storage area is provided for storing values. In this embodiment, the hit/fail random number storage area uses 2 bytes to store the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1. The winning type random number storage area and reach random number storage area each use 1 byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

Furthermore, in the execution area of the special variable reservation area, there is a variable display (first variable display) based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, or based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. A variation storage area is provided for storing information indicating whether the display is a variation display (second variation display). Hereinafter, ``storing information indicating that the variation storage area is the first variation display'' is also referred to as ``setting the first variation flag to ON'', and ``that the variation storage area is the second variation display''. "the information indicating is stored" is also referred to as "the second fluctuation flag is set to ON".

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start prize winning device 33b based on the detection information of the second start prize winning switch 224b. If the determination in step S501 is affirmative, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second suspension counter Nb is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if the determination in step S502 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second suspension counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S504, the values of the hit/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 (the hit/fail random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer Each stored value) is stored in the first area (win/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) of the vacant reservation areas of the special variation reservation area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. In addition, the details of the success/failure determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change holding area. A type determination process for determining the type of is performed. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, if it is determined in step S505 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the big hit, the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area Perform reach determination processing to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the success/failure determination process in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area matches the value "7" or "307" stored in the first hit/fail determination table. determine whether By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are big hits both in the low-probability state and in the high-probability state.

Although FIG. 14 simplifies the processing of step S5101 for the sake of convenience, in practice, it is determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is "307". If a negative determination is also made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

If the determination in step S5101 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the first propriety flag in step S5102. In this embodiment, in addition to the success/failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, a success/failure flag is not provided separately. is stored (overwritten). As described above, the success/failure random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and in step S5102, for example, "1010101010101010" is set in the success/failure random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the fact that the setting is made in the success/failure random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first success/failure flag.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, then in step S5103 the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is the value stored in the second success/failure determination table (8 to 16, 308 to 316”. By the way, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" is a value that becomes a big hit only in the variable probability mode. Incidentally, even in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the big win match as described above.

If the determination in step S5103 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the second propriety flag in step S5104. Turning on the second right/fail flag means that, for example, "1100110011001100" is set in the right/fail random number storage area.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the "missing" state is obtained even in the high probability state, then in step S5105, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area is set to the first It is determined whether or not it matches the value "404" stored in the small hit determination table. Incidentally, "404" is a value that becomes a small hit in both a low probability state and a high probability state.

When affirmative determination is made in step S5105, after turning on the first small hit flag in step S5106, this processing is terminated. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to store (overwrite) information as to whether or not a small win state occurs in the success/failure random number storage area.

When the negative determination is made in step S5105, in step S5107, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area is the value stored in the second small hit determination table "405 to 413". It is determined whether it is one of Incidentally, "405-413" is a value that becomes a big hit only in a high-probability state. If the determination in step S5107 is affirmative, this process is terminated after turning on the second small hit flag in step S5108. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, information relating to success or failure is stored using 2 bytes. Therefore, for example, when noise occurs, the success/failure flag (stored contents of the success/failure random number storage area) is rewritten. , it is possible to prevent a situation in which a big winning state occurs even though the winning is not made or a big winning state does not occur even though the winning is made. The pattern (a combination of "1" and "0") set in the success/failure random number storage area in the success/failure determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number storage area. be.

In addition to the success/failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, a success/failure flag may be provided separately so that the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored at this time, and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored as it is. In the variable display setting process that is performed at the start, it may be configured such that success or failure is determined by referring to a corresponding table based on the value of the success/failure random number counter C1. A random number counter for small wins may be provided separately from the hit/fail random number counter C1 used for judging big wins.

Next, the second type determination processing in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first or second success flag has been set to ON in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S5401 (there is a possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), in step S5402, the second type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special change reservation area It is determined whether the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16RS". If the determination in step S5402 is affirmative, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403, and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, a 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2. information is stored (overwritten). As described above, the winning type random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in step S5403, for example, "10101010" is set in the winning type random number storage area. In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as "16RS" in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag (such as a 16RS flag) indicating the jackpot type. explain. The pattern (a combination of "1" and "0") set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determination process is not used when the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It's a pattern.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "8RS" by referring to the second type determination table in step S5404. It is determined whether or not it matches any one of "7 to 13". If the determination in step S5404 is affirmative, in step S5405, the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, "00011111" is set in the winning type random number storage area), and this process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S5404 is negative, in step S5406, the second type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "2RN30". It is determined whether or not it matches any one of "14 to 17". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5406, the 2RN30 flag is turned on in step S5407, and this process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S5406 is negative, in step S5408, the second type determination table is taken into account, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "2RN60". It is determined whether or not it matches with "18". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, the 2RN60 flag is turned on in step S5409, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S5408 is negative, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area is "19" corresponding to "2RN90", so in step S5410, 2RN90 After turning on the flag, this processing ends. In addition, in the type determination process, it is only necessary to determine the jackpot type. It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to "2RN90" and the acquired random number value match.

Next, reach determination processing in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first success flag has been set in the previous success determination process. If the determination in step S5301 is affirmative, that is, if the jackpot is achieved in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the jackpot state always occurs), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot state does not occur at least in the low probability state (there is a possibility of being out), in step S5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and a new It is determined whether or not the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the special variation reservation area matches one of the values '0, 1' corresponding to the 'outside reach'. If the determination in step S5302 is affirmative, in step S5303, the front-rear flag indicating the occurrence of front-rear out-of-reach reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, there is no separate front/rear flag. is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in step S5303, for example, "10101010" is set for the reach random number storage area. In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, setting the reach random number storage area will be referred to as turning on the before/after flag.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the reach determination table is taken into account in step S5304, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation reservation area corresponds to "reach other than front and rear deviation". It determines whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21". If the determination in step S5304 is affirmative, the flag other than before and after is turned on in step S5305, and then this process ends. Note that turning on the flag other than before and after means that, for example, "11001100" is set in the reach random number storage area.

If a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the variable display ends without going through the reach state, that is, "completely out", this process ends. The pattern (a combination of "1" and "0") set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when storing the value of the variation selection counter C3 in the reach random number storage area. be.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 subsequent to step S507, a preceding command setting process is performed. In addition, in the starting command, the change information (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the change display) that is reserved and stored is triggered by which of the first start prize winning device 33a or the second start prize winning device 33b. Along with information indicating whether or not, information indicating the results of the validity determination process, type determination process, and reach determination process is included, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201) .

After the processing of step S508, or when the negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, the first start winning switch 224a determines whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33. is determined by the detection information of If a negative determination is made in step S509, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S510, the value of the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the winning of the first start prize winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S510, this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the first suspension counter Na is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S512, each value of the success/failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the vacant reservation areas (the success/failure random number storage area, the winning type random number storage area, the reach random number storage area) of the special variation reservation area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, a win/fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a big win. The details of the suitability determination process have already been described above.

In the subsequent step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change holding area, the big hit A first type determination process for determining the type is performed. In the present embodiment, there are two cases: a case of winning a big win in a winning lottery based on a ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, and a case of winning a big win in a winning lottery based on a ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. So, the distribution of the given jackpot type is different.

Here, the first type determination processing in step S514 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second success/failure flag has been set to ON in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility of occurrence of a jackpot state), in step S5202, the first type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special change reservation area It is determined whether the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16RS". If the determination in step S5202 is affirmative, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S5202 is negative, in step S5204, the first type determination table is taken into account, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "8RN". It is determined whether or not it matches any one of "12 to 17". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S5204 is negative, in step S5206, the first type determination table is taken into account, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to "2RS". It is determined whether or not it matches with either of "18, 19". If the determination in step S5206 is affirmative, in step S5207 the 2RS flag is turned on, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208, and this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a big hit, the variation newly stored in the special variation holding area Based on the value of the selection counter C3, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. Details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

After step S515, in step S516, a preceding command setting process is performed, and this process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start-up winning device 33a or the second start-up winning device 33b, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is directly stored in the special change holding area, and then the success/failure determination process is performed. , type determination processing, and reach determination processing are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area (work area) is provided to temporarily store the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 when these counter values are acquired. After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the reservation area of the corresponding special change reservation area is stored.

Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S601, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of suspensions of variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal reservation counter is reached. Increment Nc by one.

In addition, in the following step S604, a random number related to success or failure is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM503. After that, the through gate passage processing ends.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112.

In the processing of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in the subsequent step S114. After that, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command is transmitted to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off. In step S110, the used register is recovered from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S211 is executed as periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S212 and S213 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the starting prize winning unit 33 updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is sent to the sub side. Execute external output processing such as sending to each control device.

For example, when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262 . In other words, the variation pattern command and the pattern command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform a display effect that matches the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input a variation pattern command, a pattern command, etc., determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative pattern display device 42 based on such various commands, and determines the variation mode. on the decorative pattern display device 42 (variation display).

For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information specifying the variation type of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Although the fluctuation pattern command and the like are originally a 2-byte binary number (output method similar to that of the pending information command), they are indicated by 4-bit hexadecimal numbers for the sake of convenience. In this embodiment, for example, in normal mode and latent mode, any one of "FF10", "FF11", "FF12", "FF13", "FF14", "FF15", and "FF16" is used as a variation pattern command. set. In addition, "FD10", "FD11", "FD12", "FD13", "FD14", "FD15", and "FD16" are set in the variable probability mode and the time reduction mode. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of decorative symbols in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variable display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, sound, and the like.

Hereinafter, the variation type of decorative symbols and the correspondence relationship between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

Normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed except for variations in decorative patterns. Then, "FF11" or "FD11" is set to the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach depending on the mode. In the probability variable mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode and the latent probability mode even in various reach situations. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is "15 seconds" in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, and "10 seconds" in the probability variable mode and the time reduction mode.

Super ready-to-win is a ready-to-win pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in addition to the decorative patterns during the variable display of the decorative patterns (after establishment of the ready-to-win state), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. be. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. Then, if super reach SR1, "FF12" or "FD12" is set in the variation pattern command, if super reach SR2, "FF13" or "FD13" is set, and if super reach SR3, "FF14" or "FD14" is set.

Premium reach is a production mode that can be derived only when the jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of decorative patterns (after the reach state is established), characters with patterns different from super reach are displayed in addition to decorative patterns. It is a reach pattern that is performed in a manner that is expected to give the player a sense of expectation. In the present embodiment, two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared, and the variable display time differs for each type of premium reach. And if it is premium reach PR1, "FF15" or "FD15" will be set to a fluctuation pattern command. For premium reach PR2, "FF16" or "FD16" is set.

In addition, "FF10" or "FD10" is set as the variation pattern command corresponding to "completely out", which does not result in any reach state, depending on the mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time to be completely off is set to "10 seconds" in normal mode and latent probability mode, and "6 seconds" in probability variable mode and time reduction mode.

Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop pattern (combination of stop patterns) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine the stop symbol, and includes a combination of probability variable jackpot symbols, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of front and back off symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and back off, and a complete off symbol. It designates five categories of combinations of These divisions are indicated by, for example, "AA11", "AA12", "AA13", "AA14", and "AA15", any one of which is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol command.

The classification of the stop symbols and the correspondence relationship between the stop symbols and the symbol commands will be described below. If you win a probability variable jackpot (“16RS” and “8RS”, hereinafter also referred to as “probability variable jackpot with balls”) that can increase the number of game balls, or a normal jackpot (“8RN”) that can increase the number of game balls (Hereinafter, also referred to as "normal jackpot with balls to be played"), the decorative pattern display device 42 stops and displays the decorative patterns with the number patterns in a combination of doubles. becomes. In the present embodiment, in the case of "probability variable jackpot with ball output", a probability variable jackpot pattern that is a combination of decorative patterns consisting of odd numbers of any of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, or 2 , 4, 6, or 8, which is a combination of ornamental patterns consisting of even-numbered doublets, the variable display is stopped and displayed, and in the case of "normal jackpot with payout balls" , the variable display is stopped and displayed in combination with normal jackpot symbols.

In the case of the probability variable jackpot with paid balls, the symbol command is set to "AA11", and in the case of the normal jackpot with paid balls, the symbol command is set to "AA12". Then, when "AA11" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the combination of symbols consisting of any of double eyes from 1 to 9 as the stop symbol, and "AA12 is set, one of the combination of symbols consisting of any one of 2nd, 4th, 6th and 8th doubles is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of front-rear deviating symbols corresponds to "front-rear deviating reach" in which the final stop symbol deviates from the ready-to-win pattern by one before and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win pattern and stops. "AA13" is set in the symbol command. In the present embodiment, the stop modes corresponding to "2RS", "2RN", and "minor win" are also combinations of front and rear deviated symbols. The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to "Reach other than front and back off" in which the final stop symbol stops at a place other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach, and the symbol corresponding to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "AA14" is set in the command. The combination of completely missing symbols corresponds to "completely missing" in which even reach does not occur, and "AA15" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of completely missing symbols. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops displaying a combination of front and rear missing symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear missing symbols, and a combination of completely missing symbols, the result is "missing".

Although details will be described later, when "AA13" to "AA15" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops symbol combinations stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determined as In the present embodiment, three commands "AA13" to "AA15" are prepared for the symbol command for failure. The configuration may be such that the sub-controller 262 determines the combination of decorative patterns.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 .

In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Thereafter, in step S205, special display control processing is executed. In this process, the control of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, as well as determination of a big hit, setting of variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42, and the like. The details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, a first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the first variable winning device 32a is performed. In the present embodiment, when winning the lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, the big win state or the small win state in which the first variable prize winning device 32a is opened is derived. there is Details of the first variable winning device control processing will be described later.

In step S207, a second variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, when winning the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, a big win state or a small win state in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened is derived. there is The details of this second variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this normal display control process will be described later.

In step S209, a starting winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the starting winning unit 33 is performed. The details of this startup winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S210, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S211, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. ) has passed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (steps S212 and S213).

That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

Also, in step S213, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly fluctuates. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Also, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), it means that the power has been shut down, so the processes from step S214 onward are performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step S214, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S215, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to

After that, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step S218, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Thereafter, in step S219, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the process of step S210 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes at steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at different times. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step S214), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the special display control processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current state is other than the big win state or the small win state by referring to the win situation storage area which will be described later in detail. During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the specific display devices 43L and 43R stop displaying the display mode corresponding to the jackpot to when the first or second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are opened, A round period in which the first or second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b are open, an interval period in which the first or second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b are closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started. During the small win state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small win is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R to when the first or second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are opened; A round period in which the first or second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b are open, an interval period in which the first or second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b are closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started.

The win state storage area of the present embodiment stores "0" in states other than the big win state and the small win state, and stores "1" during the opening period and the interval period in the big win state and the small win state. , "2" is stored during the round period, and "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the win state storage area, and it is determined whether or not the player is in a big win state or a small win state. It should be noted that it is for convenience that numerical values such as "0" to "3" are stored in the winning situation storage area, and actually the winning situation storage area uses 2 bytes.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is in the state of a big hit or a small hit, the processing is terminated as it is. By looking at the setting status of the special figure display flag, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed by the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42). Specifically, when the special figure display flag is in the ON state, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special figure display flag is in the OFF state, it is considered to be in the stopped display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped. . In addition, although it will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

Then, when a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, when it is not in the big win state or the small win state and is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S803, and is triggered by the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the second suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display (second variable display) is greater than zero.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if even one second variation display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the second retention counter Nb in step S804. Note that in this embodiment, if the second variable display is reserved and stored by the determination processing in step S803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. That is, even if the first variable display is retained and stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is given priority (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

In subsequent step S805, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the second special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step S805, in step S806, processing for causing the change identification lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. Thereafter, in step S807, variable display setting processing, which will be described later in detail, is performed, and then this processing ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no second variable display is retained and stored, in step S808, a variable display ( It is determined whether or not the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions in the first variable display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S808, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the first suspension counter Na in step S809. In subsequent step S810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the first special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step S810, in step S811, processing for causing the change identification lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. After that, in step S807, variable display setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the present embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special change reservation area, and the data stored in the first special change reservation area and the second special change reservation area are used when performing a change display based on the data. will be shifted to the common execution area.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described later in detail, is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is in a high-probability state (variable probability mode or latent probability mode). The mode storage area stores discrimination information for discriminating the game mode. In this embodiment, the mode storage area stores any value of "11", "12", "21", and "22", where "11" corresponds to the normal mode and "12" corresponds to the time reduction mode, "21" corresponds to the variable probability mode, and "22" corresponds to the latent probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the mode storage area stores "21" or "22", thereby determining whether or not the high probability state exists.

If the determination in step S901 is affirmative, that is, if it is in a high probability state (variable probability mode, latent probability mode), in step S902, the success or failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not either the 1 or the second right/wrong flag (see right/wrong determination processing in FIG. 14) is set to ON. When the determination in step S902 is affirmative, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the state is a low-probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), then in step S903, the success/failure random number storage area is taken into consideration to determine whether the first success/failure flag is on. determine whether or not When the determination in step S903 is affirmative, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, a big win confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the big win state has been confirmed is set to ON. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to confirmation of occurrence of a big win state in the win/fail random number storage area is referred to as turning on a big win confirmation flag.

In the subsequent step S905, referring to the variation storage area of the execution area of the special variation reservation area, whether or not the second variation flag is set to ON, that is, the variation display performed this time is sent to the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not it is the second variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the ball. If the determination in step S905 is affirmative, in step S906, the 16RS flag (see type determination processing in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special change reservation area. Determine whether or not

If the determination in step S906 is affirmative, that is, if it is "16RS", 16RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting variation pattern commands and symbol commands) is performed in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the generation of "16RS". Determine the variation pattern (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L, 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42, and set the variation pattern command and the pattern command based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S931, which will be described later.

Also, if the determination in step S906 is negative, in step S908, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is turned on by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. If the determination in step S908 is affirmative, that is, if it is "8RS", 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S931.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S908 is negative, it is determined in step S910 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S910 is affirmative, 2RN30 pattern setting processing is performed in step S911. After step S911, the process proceeds to step S931.

Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S912 is affirmative, 2RN60 pattern setting processing is performed in step S913. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S931.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the 2RN90 flag is set to ON, 2RN90 pattern setting processing is performed in step S914. After step S914, the process proceeds to step S931.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S905, that is, when the variable display performed this time is the first variable display for teaching the result of the lottery triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start prize winning device 33a. In step S915, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is turned on by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special change reservation area.

If the determination in step S915 is affirmative, 16RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S916. After step S916, the process proceeds to step S931, which will be described later.

In addition, if the determination in step S915 is negative, in step S917, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S917, that is, if "8RS", 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S918. After step S918, the process proceeds to step S931.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether or not the 8RN flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S919, 8RN pattern setting processing is performed in step S920. After step S920, the process proceeds to step S931.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S919, that is, if the 2RS flag is set to ON, 2RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S921. After step S921, the process proceeds to step S931.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the success or failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and the first or It is determined whether or not the second small hit flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S922 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that a small hit has been won in the winning lottery in the high probability state, in step S923, a small prize indicating that the occurrence of the small hit state has been confirmed. Set the hit confirmation flag to ON. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, to store a value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the small hit state in the success/failure random number storage area is referred to as turning on the small hit confirmation flag. Then, in step S924, after performing a small hit pattern setting process, it transfers to step S931.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S925, the success or failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and the first small It is determined whether or not the hit flag is on. When it is determined affirmatively in the step S925, that is, when it is determined that a small hit is won in the lottery in the low probability state, the small hit determination flag is set to ON in step S923, and in step S924. After performing the small hit pattern setting process, it moves to step S931.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is considered, and the front and rear flags (Fig. 17) is on. If the determination in step S926 is affirmative, that is, if it is the "front-back reach", the front-back reach pattern setting process is performed in step S927, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

Also, if the determination in step S926 is negative, in step S928, the reach random number storage area in the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is "reach other than front and back out", reach pattern setting processing other than front and back is performed in step S929, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

If the determination in step S928 is negative, that is, if the result is "complete failure", the failure variation pattern setting process is performed in step S930, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

In step S931, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display is set to ON. This indicates that the conditions for switching display (variable display) have been established in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the following step S932, a setting process of a special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed. The special figure display timer is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display.

The variable display times of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment are set to values corresponding to the variable patterns selected by the variable type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the setting of such a special figure display timer, in the external output process of the next normal process, when a control signal to the effect of starting the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R , the special display devices 43L and 43R start switching display (variable display). In addition, the sub-control device 262, which has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command, starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the special display devices 43L and 43R start to vary, and the special display device Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42 is stopped and displayed by combining the patterns based on the pattern command. After step S932 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the starting prize-winning process, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 is acquired and stored in the special variable holding area, the success/failure determination process in steps S505 and S513, and the variable display setting. In the process, a win/fail lottery is configured by the processes of steps S901 to S903, S922, and S925 for judging win/fail based on the win/fail flag, the small hit flag, and the situation at that time.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when the determination is affirmative in step S802, that is, when the variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S812 to perform subtraction processing of the special figure display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has passed by taking into consideration the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes "0", step S813 is affirmatively determined.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, switching display setting is performed to continue the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and this processing ends. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S813, the special figure displaying flag is turned off in step S814, and the stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S815. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the next external output process in the normal process. That is, stop display is performed in a stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, loss, or the like. Also, a control signal is output to the sub-control device 262 to the effect that the decorative pattern display device 42 is to be stopped. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative design display device 42 are reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-controller 262 according to the pattern command and the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information about the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 is need not be added. In addition, although it will be repeated, the stop display by such special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for production). there is

Subsequently, in step S816, after initial setting of the winning state and determination information setting processing for measuring the period of the time reduction mode are performed, this processing is terminated. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 21 .

First, in step S1001, the success/failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1001 is affirmative, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation reservation area.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, "16" is set to a round number counter for determining the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) to be executed during the jackpot state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether or not the 2RS flag or the 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set to ON.

If the determination in step S1004 is negative, that is, if the 8RS flag or 8RN flag is set to ON, in step S1005, the round number counter is set to "8". After step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. In the following step S1007, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set to the special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening/closing control of the first and second variable prize winning devices 32a and 32b). set. Subsequently, in step S1008, the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b is set to 8, which is the maximum number of winning balls per round. set to "8" to indicate The value of the winning counter is determined by the first and second count switches 223a to determine whether or not a ball has entered the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. , 223b, and if it is determined that a ball has entered the first and second variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-controller 262 of the start of the winning state is set. The opening command includes winning type information and the like, so that even the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the winning state. After step S1009, the process ends.

In addition, in the jackpot state, the promotion of the appearance of the jackpot type, etc. or teaches that "16RS" has been won in the jackpot state immediately after when the odd double number is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42). .

Further, when the determination in step S1001 is negative, that is, when it is determined that the win is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, the hit/fail random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON.

If affirmative determination is made in step S1010 (small hit), or if affirmative determination is made in step S1004 ("2RS" or "2RN"), in step S1011, "2" is set to the round number counter. set. After step S1011, in step S1012, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. In the following step S1013, the special variable timer is set to a value "5000" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 2 seconds. Set command. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if neither the big win nor the small win is determined in step S1010, then in step S1016 it is determined whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, the time reduction mode. or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1016, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1016 is affirmative, in step S1017, the value of the variation number counter is subtracted by 1 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state of "8RN", "2RN30", "2RN60", and "2RN90", the fluctuation display corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is displayed on the fluctuation counter. is set, and 1 is subtracted in the step S1010 each time the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) are displayed once.

In the subsequent step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, at the end of the winning state, the special display devices 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode are still displayed. If not, the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1018 is affirmative, in step S1019, "11" is set in the mode storage area to indicate the normal mode. That is, when the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the variable display for a specified number of times, the time reduction mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After step S1019, in step S1020, after setting a time-saving end command for informing the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time-saving mode, this process is ended.

In the present embodiment, the processing for initializing the small winning state and the processing for initializing the big winning states of 2RS and 2RN are shared, but they may be performed separately.

Next, the first variable winning device control processing for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the winning state storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the big winning state and the small winning state. If the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, that is, if the state is neither a big hit state nor a small hit state, the processing is terminated as it is. By the way, at the start of the big win state or the small win state, "1" is set in the win situation storage area in the determination information setting process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if it is in a big hit state or a small hit state (if any of "1" to "3" is set in the hit situation storage area), step S1202 , it is determined whether or not the first variation flag is turned on in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, "2000" or "500" is set to the special variable timer in the determination information setting process.

In subsequent step S1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not "1" is set in the win situation storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, then in step S1206 "2" is set in the win situation storage area. In the following step S1207, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot with balls. Here, any one of "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN", which are jackpots with balls that can be awarded in the case of winning in the winning lottery that is triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start prize winning device 33a. It is determined whether or not there is (whether it is other than "2RS").

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1209, the value "100" corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a for the special variable timer. set.

After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, a process of opening the first variable prize winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1211, the sub-control device 262 is informed of the round to start the round. Set command. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1205 is negative, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not "3" is set in the win situation storage area. Although details will be described later, "3" is set in the win situation storage area when all rounds in the big win state or the small win state are completed and the ending period is started. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is not yet time to end the big win state or small win state, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1213.

In subsequent step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process moves to step S1215, and "1" is set in the win situation storage area. After that, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot with balls.

If the determination in step S1216 is affirmative, in step S1217 a value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set for the special variable timer. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1216 is negative, in step S1218 a value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1217 or step S1218, in step S1219, the winning counter is set to "8". Further, in step S1220, the first variable winning device 32a is closed, and in step S1221, an interval command is set to inform the sub-controller 262 of the start of the interval. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1204 is negative, that is, if the time (open time or closed time) to maintain the open state or closed state of the first variable prize winning device 32a remains, the process proceeds to step S1222. , determines whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 32a is "0". The winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit of the number of winnings per round (predetermined number) at the start of the big win state or the small win state and the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted each time a game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a.

If a negative determination is made in step S1222, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1222 is affirmative, that is, if the round end opportunity has arrived without waiting for the set period of the round to elapse, the process proceeds to step S1213. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable prize winning device 32 during one round, the round is promptly terminated at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not passed. Become.

If the determination in step S1214 is affirmative, that is, if all the rounds in the big win state or small win state have been completed, the process moves to step S1223, and "3" is set in the win situation storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot with balls. If the determination in step S1224 is affirmative, in step S1225 a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1224 is negative, in step S1226 a value "250" corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1225 or step S1226, in step S1227, the winning counter is set to "7". In addition, when the processing for setting the ending after step S1223 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is "0". If the value of the prize winning counter is set to "0" at the start of the ending period, the first variable prize winning device control process after 4 msec will suddenly result in an affirmative determination in step S1222, and the ending period will not be completed. Can not. Therefore, in step S1227, a provisional value other than "0" ("7" in this example) is set in the winning counter so that the ending period can be completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1227, in step S1228, a process of closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in subsequent step S1229, an ending command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 of starting the ending. . After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1212 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period has ended and the time to end the jackpot state has arrived, the process proceeds to step S1230, and end setting processing is performed. In the end setting process, setting of the mode storage area and setting of the change number counter are performed.

Here, the termination setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, the success/failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the small hit confirmation flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the 8RN flag is set to ON.

If the determination in step S1402 is affirmative, in step S1403 a value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area. As a result, the time reduction mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state.

In the following step S1404, "90" is set for the variation counter. Note that the fluctuation number counter indicates that when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started, the fluctuation display for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is completed. It is intended to grasp the fact that After step S1404, the process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S1402 is negative, in step S1405, the winning type random number storage area in the execution area is referenced to determine whether or not the 2RN90 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1405 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1403 as in the case where the 8RN flag is set to ON.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1405 is negative, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1406 is affirmative, in step S1407, "12" is set in the mode storage area, in step S1408, "60" is set in the variation counter, and then this process ends. .

Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1409 is affirmative, in step S1410, "12" is set in the mode storage area, and in step S1411, "30" is set in the variation counter, and then this process ends. .

If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1412 whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1412 is affirmative, "22" is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. As a result, the latent probability mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state. After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1412 is negative, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the variable probability mode is given after the end of the jackpot state. After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after step S1230, in step S1231, "0" is set in the winning state storage area to indicate that the state is neither a big winning state nor a small winning state. After that, in step S1232, after setting a hit end command to convey information to the effect that the big win state or the small win state is ended to the sub-control device 262, this process is ended. The hit end command includes the game mode set in the end setting process, the number information of the fluctuation number counter, and the like.

In addition, in the second variable winning device control processing of step S207 of the normal processing (see FIG. 10), the target of the opening/closing control is basically the second variable winning device 32b in contrast to the first variable winning device control processing. The only difference is that it is executed when the second variation flag is set to ON, and it is determined whether it is 16RS or 8RS when determining whether it is a jackpot with balls, so the description thereof is omitted. do.

Next, the normal display control processing in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern display flag indicating whether or not the normal pattern display device 41 is performing variable display is on. In addition, when the normal pattern display flag is ON, it is considered that the normal pattern display device 41 is in the process of variable display.

If the determination in step S2101 is negative, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, when the variable display of normal symbols is not even one, the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the determination in step S2102 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2103.

In the subsequent step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After that, in step S2105, normal pattern fluctuation setting processing for setting and starting the normal pattern fluctuation display in the normal pattern display device 41 is executed.

Here, with reference to Drawing 25, normal figure fluctuation setting processing is explained. First, in step S2301, the normal pattern display flag indicating that the normal pattern display device 41 is normally displaying the variable pattern is turned on. In the following step S2302, the win situation storage area is referenced to determine whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether the current state is other than the big win state or the small win state. If the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, that is, if neither the big win state nor the small win state, in step S2303, whether or not the value "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area. That is, it is determined whether or not the player is in a high ball entry state (shortening time mode or variable probability mode).

When the affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, for the normal pattern display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal pattern display device 41, the normal pattern fluctuation display time Set to "100" for 0.4 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area is "0". In addition, in the high ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", is "1 to 99", the win is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball-entering support lottery for whether or not to open the second starting prize-winning device 33b is won, in step S2306, it is determined that the ball-entering support lottery has been won. Turn on the ball entry support flag that indicates. After step S2306, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this process ends.

In addition, step S2302 or, when the negative determination is made in step S2303, that is, when it is in the jackpot state, the small hit state, or the low ball entering state, in step S2307, the general pattern display timer is set to the normal pattern. "2000" is set to set the variable display time to 8 seconds. Furthermore, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area is "1". In addition, in the low ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 99", is "1", the win is won.

If the determination in step S2308 is affirmative, that is, if the ball-entering support lottery is won, a ball-entering support flag indicating that the ball-entering support lottery has been won is set to ON in step S2309. After step S2309, or if a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, this processing ends after step S2105. In addition, based on the setting in the normal pattern fluctuation setting process, in the external output process of the next normal process, when the control signal to the effect of starting the fluctuation display is normally output to the design display device 41, the normal design display device At 41 the variable display is started. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "O" or "X" as normal symbols, and if "O" is displayed, "X" or "X" is displayed. If so, the display is switched (changed) to "○".

In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform processing for subtracting the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal diagram display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, in step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal diagram display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. When affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the flag during normal pattern display is turned off in step S2108, and normal pattern stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal pattern display device 41 is performed in step S2109. And, based on the setting contents of this normal figure stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal to the effect that the normal symbol display device 41 performs stop display is output. That is, when winning (when the entry support flag is set to ON), the "○" pattern (winning pattern) is stopped and displayed (eg, lit for a few seconds), and when it is out, "X" Stop displaying the pattern.

Then, it progresses to step S2110, normal figure discrimination|determination information setting processing is performed, and this processing is complete|finished. Here, normal figure discrimination information setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 26 .

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the ball entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state is set to ON.

Various control signals are output to the second starting winning device 33b in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the ON/OFF state of the normal variable flag. When the normal variable flag is ON, a control signal for driving the starting winning shutter 405 to open the big winning opening is output to the second starting winning device 33b, and the second starting winning device 33b is opened. . On the other hand, when the normal variable flag is off, a control signal is output to the second starting winning device 33b to drive the starting winning shutter 405 in the opposite direction to close the big winning opening, and the second starting winning device 33b is output. is closed.

In the subsequent step S2403, it is determined whether or not one of "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the player is in a high ball entry state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to 4 for the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting prize winning device 33b. Set to "1000" for seconds.

Further, in step S2405, an opening number counter for counting the number of times (remaining number of times) to open the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to "3" so as to open the second starting prize winning device 33b three times. After step S2405, the process ends.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, when the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "100". In the following step S2407, "1" is set to the opening counter to open the second starting prize winning device 33b once. After step S2407, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, when the negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, the switching display setting for continuing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is executed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "o", the display is switched to "x", and if it is "x", the display is switched to "o". As a result, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the starting winning device control processing in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the ball entry support flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not the general map displaying flag is set to ON. If the determination is affirmative in step S2202, that is, it has been decided to open the second starting winning device 33b, but the corresponding normal symbol variation display is still performed, and at the timing of opening If not, the processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2202 is negative, the value of the normal variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S2203. In subsequent step S2204, it is determined whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If the determination in step S2204 is affirmative, that is, if the second starting prize winning device 33b is open, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2205, that is, if the predetermined opening time of the second start-up winning device 33b has not yet passed, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2205 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2206 to turn off the normal variable flag. In the subsequent step S2207, 1 is subtracted from the value of the open number counter. After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter is "0". If the determination in step S2208 is affirmative, the process ends after the ball entry support flag is turned off in step S2209.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2209, that is, the winning ball entry support lottery was performed in the probability variable mode or the time reduction mode, and the second start prize winning device 33b is opened three times based on that. If there is a remaining number of times, a value (for example, "100") corresponding to the interval time is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, the process ends.

Further, if the determination in step S2204 is negative, that is, if it is the interval period during which the second start-up prize winning device 33b is opened three times (the second start-up prize winning device 33b is in a closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, if the interval period has not yet passed, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2211 is affirmative, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value corresponding to the opening time ("1000" in this example) is set for the normal variable timer in step S2213. After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first the reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. As shown in FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception processing of a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by an interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In timer interrupt processing, it is checked whether a command has been received before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and an external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

At step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step S3116 the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3114 the interrupt is permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cutoff is restored, in step S3110, the power cutout occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut off, so the processing from step S3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the processing of step S3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the processing that is performed when the power is turned on is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command is acquired from the main control device 261, and determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. FIG. In the command determination process (steps S3124, S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main controller 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 whether it is a prize ball command It is determined whether or not

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, it will not be paid out if there are prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and a loss is given to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 30, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

After that, in step S3205, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state canceled state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. , execute the setting of the lower tray full state release state. Further, in step S3206, setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank canceled state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-ball-in-tank switch, the no-ball-in-tank state, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, the no-ball-in-tank state, and the no-tank-ball canceled state are set. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step S3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step S3209, and motor drive processing is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In subsequent step S3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing for storing the information of the preceding command output from the main controller 261 in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 is performed. The starting command includes information indicating whether the variation display is triggered by the entry of a ball in the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b, as described above, and indicates whether the variation information corresponds to a big win. information, information indicating the type of jackpot, and information indicating the type of reach.

The pending information storage area, similar to the special variable pending area of the main control device 261, has a first pending information storage area and a second pending information storage area each having four pending areas (first pending area to fourth pending area). , and one execution area. In the first pending information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the starting command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area), information on whether it is a big hit, whether it is a big hit, whether it is a small hit Information on whether or not, and information (variation information) on variable display such as reach type are stored in chronological order. Further, in the second reserved information storage area, fluctuation information is stored chronologically according to the reception history of the preceding commands based on the second fluctuation display (information stored in the second special fluctuation reserved area). By adopting this configuration, the variation information regarding the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b. Four pieces of variation information about each can be stored in a reserved manner. As a result, it is possible for the sub-controller 262 to grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special variable reservation areas of the main controller 261, but also the variation information stored in the reservation areas. .

The pending information storage process will be described below with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not an advance command has been received (whether or not the advance command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S4101 is affirmative, in step S4102 does the starting command correspond to the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation reservation area)? determine whether or not If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the entry of the first starting prize winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation reservation area), in step S4103 , increments by one a first variation pending counter Nd that counts the number of pending changes in the variable information stored in the first pending information storage area.

In the following step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot included in the starting command, information on the type of jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small hit, information on the reach type, etc. are stored in the vacant reservation area of the first reservation information storage area. stored in the first area.

Further, in the following step S4105, the advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where mutually related effect displays are intentionally derived in a plurality of consecutive variable displays (so-called "continuous advance notice" is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to perform the continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored as the first reservation information Of the areas, the change information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 49). The continuous announcement counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the continuous announcement counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous announcement counter buffer).

The advance notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

Then, in the notice information storing process, when the change information is stored in the pending information storage area, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area is provided with a continuous announcement flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous announcement is derived.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice propriety determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to perform continuous notices, and a notice table that is taken into account when deciding the form of continuous notices. A plurality of notice adequacy determination tables and notice tables are provided, respectively, and the notice adequacy determination tables and notice tables to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first suspension lamps 46a in the off state (for example, the leftmost one among the four first suspension lamps 46a that are extinguished) is turned on. state. The first holding lamp 46a of this embodiment emits blue light. In the following step S4107, continuous announcement lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not continuous announcements are to be executed, and then this process ends.

In addition, in the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107, when the value of the first variable suspension counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first suspension information storage area, A notice propriety determination table corresponding to each of the jackpot type, the ready-to-win type, and the game mode is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first reservation information storage area, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type and game mode to determine whether or not to execute continuous advance notice. In addition, the continuous notice flags of all the reservation areas in which the variation information is stored are turned on among the reservation areas of the first reservation information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation reservation area) , the process advances to step S4108 to increment by 1 a second variation suspension counter Ne that counts the number of suspensions of variation information stored in the second suspension information storage area.

After that, in step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot included in the starting command, information on the type of jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small hit, information on the reach type, etc. are stored in the vacant reservation area of the second reservation information storage area. stored in the first area. In the following step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the reserve area where the change information is newly stored in step S4109 of the second reserve information storage area.

After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second holding lamps 46b that are in the off state (for example, the leftmost one of the four second lamps 46b that are off) is turned on. and The second holding lamp 46b of this embodiment emits red light. In the subsequent step S4112, a continuous announcement lottery process for determining whether or not to execute continuous announcements is performed, and this process ends. Note that the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4112 only corresponds to the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4107 when the ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b, and the description thereof is omitted.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3912.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used to set the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of the jackpot, and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative pattern counter CO determines the pattern (jackpot pattern) when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern display device 42 is stopped when the jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is used. has nine counter values (0 to 8). That is, the jackpot decoration pattern counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

Then, when the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is "AA11" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the variable probability jackpot is to be stopped, a table (not shown) (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol), For example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1", and if it is 1, it is "2". This jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-controller 262 receives a symbol command as described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is stored in the RAM 553 jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer. can be

Also, if the symbol command is "AA12" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, "2" (double), if 2 to 4 A combination of jackpot patterns is determined, such as "4" (double), "6" (double) for 5 and 6, and "8" (double) for 7 and 8. .

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combinations of the stop symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery is lost. Since one of the nine decorative patterns is displayed in the row, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each row. A stopped pattern in the upper pattern display area is determined by the upper pattern counter CL, a stopped pattern in the middle pattern display area is determined by the medium pattern counter CM, and a stopped pattern in the lower pattern display area is determined by the lower pattern counter CR.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built into the CPU 551 . That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . The pattern counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of the pattern counters CL, CM, CR are the front-rear off reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553, the non-front-rear off reach pattern buffer, and the complete It is stored in any of the outlier pattern buffers.

Here, updating processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper design counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the medium design counter CM. The top, middle, and bottom pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, the determination in step S4001 is affirmative. Also, if the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update processing, the determination in step S4002 is affirmative. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If it is time to update the medium design counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium design counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower design counter CR (NO in both steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower design counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the lower 3-bit value of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the CL, CM, and CR updating process, the upper, middle, and lower pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timings of the respective counter values overlap. no. As a result, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated each time the updating process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of ready-to-win symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is a combination of ready-to-win symbols (S4006 is YES), then in step S4007, whether or not it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). determine whether If the determination in step S4007 is affirmative, this processing is terminated without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and rear deviated symbols. If the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear out-of-order patterns (front-to-rear out-of-reach reach) (S4008 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. It is stored in the out-of-reach pattern buffer, and this processing ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than front-rear deviation (Reach other than front-rear deviation) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. are stored in the ready-to-win pattern buffer of the RAM 553 except for front and back deviation, and this processing is terminated.

Also, if the combination is other than the ready-to-win pattern (NO in S4006), the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of losing patterns (completely missing patterns), so in step S4011, the The combination of the lost pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at the time is stored in the complete lost pattern buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is completed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3906, a hold process is performed. The suspension process will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second variation suspension counter Ne is greater than "0". If the determination in step S4202 is negative, that is, if the variation information of the second variation display is not stored pending, the process proceeds to step S4203, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the first variation pending counter Nd.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variable display is preferentially digested over the first variable display, and when the second variable display is retained and stored, the first variable display is digested. never That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is retained and stored in the second retention information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether or not the value of the second variation pending counter Ne is greater than "0", the variation pattern command is displayed in the first variation display and the second variation display. It is determined which of the fluctuation information has. Of course, the variation pattern command is given information as to which variation information of the first variation display and the second variation display corresponds, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is the first variation display and the second variation display. It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display has.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the first reserved information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of →execution area, second reserved area→first reserved area, third reserved area→second reserved area, fourth reserved area→third reserved area.

In subsequent step S4205, one of the lit first suspension lamps 46a (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first suspension lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if at least one piece of variation information for the second variation display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second variation retention counter Ne in step S4206.

In subsequent step S4207, a process of shifting the data stored in the second pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the second reserved information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. In this embodiment, there is only one execution area for the pending information storage area, and the data stored in the first pending information storage area and the second pending information storage area are displayed in a variable display corresponding to the data. are shifted into the common execution area.

In the subsequent step S4208, one of the lit second suspension lamps 46b (for example, the rightmost one of the lit second suspension lamps 46b) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

In step S4209, advance notice setting processing is performed to determine the type of display effect used for continuous advance notice. In the notice setting process of step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is ON. is not performed, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, what is the type, and if it is not a jackpot, it is determined what the reach type is. , and determine the type of continuous notice by referring to the corresponding table. The continuous announcement of the type determined here is derived at the desired timing for the corresponding variable display. After step S4209, this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, the second variable display is preferentially digested over the first variable display. If a ball is entered into the second starting prize winning device 33b during the variable display of the display, the second variable display may interrupt the first variable display for a plurality of times, and the continuous notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous notice is a display effect that can be derived even during the normal variable display when the continuous notice is not performed (the effect that can be derived for a single variable display). is used. Therefore, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, no sense of incongruity is caused.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processing such as generation of display commands to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined. For example, when receiving a variation pattern command and a symbol command, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop symbol, etc., and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command.

In addition, the display control device 45 performs drawing processing according to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the variable display of the decorative design on the decorative design display device 42. FIG. In addition, once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, the pattern is displayed under the cooperation of the sub-controller 262 and the display controller 45. continues to fluctuate.

Further, when starting the variable display, if the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4105) of the execution area of the pending information storage area is on, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, each situation By referring to the table corresponding to , the type of continuous notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. or Furthermore, in the display setting process of the step S3907, a process (hit display process) for performing effect control during a big hit or a small hit is also performed, which will be described later.

In the lamp setting process of step S3908, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative pattern display device 42. FIG.

In the sound setting process of step S3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative design display device 42. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3909.

In step S3910, the customer waiting effect (for example, demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses while the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is not performed; energy saving mode) control setting, etc. process.

In step 3911, an external output process is executed to transmit control signals based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3910 to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative design display device 42 displays the decorative design in a variable manner.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 2 msec is executed, or if the determination in step S3904 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3912 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores information on occurrence of power failure. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3913 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that information on occurrence of power failure is stored, power failure processing is executed in step S3914. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Next, the winning display processing performed in the display setting processing in step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 261 to tell the start of the big win state or the small win state. If the determination in step S4701 is affirmative, then in step S4702, a round grasping counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to "16" if it is "16RS" based on the information included in the opening command. "8" is set for "8RS" and "8RN", and "2" is set for "2RS", "2RN" and "minor win".

After that, in step S4703, if it is a jackpot with balls, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative pattern display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the setting of the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effects during the jackpot state. Choose and do it.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not an interval command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if a jackpot with balls is produced, an effect during the round is set for a maximum of 30 seconds, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S4704 is negative, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not an interval command has been received. If the determination in step S4706 is affirmative, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if the jackpot with balls is produced in step S4708, the effect during the interval of 4 seconds is set, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S4706 is negative, it is determined in step S4709 whether or not an ending command has been received. If the determination in step S4709 is affirmative, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if a jackpot with balls is produced in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then this process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot or a small hit other than the jackpot with a ball, the opening period (2 seconds), the round period (0.4 seconds), the interval period (1 second), and the ending period ( 1 second), instead of setting the effect for each period, the setting is made such that the effect (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not a winning end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately ended, and a normal game state mode in which variable display is performed is set. After that, this process is terminated.

As described in detail above, according to the first embodiment, the second start prize winning device 33b is provided with the start prize winning shutter 405 for opening and closing the start prize winning port 402, and the starting prize winning shutter 405 is at the closed position. In some cases, the starting winning opening 402 is closed, and the game ball cannot enter the starting winning opening 402 . For this reason, conventionally, the game ball rejected to enter the start winning opening 402 by the starting winning opening shutter 405 does not enter the starting winning opening 402 as it is, and is sent to the downstream side of the second start winning device 33b. It will flow down. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second starting prize winning device 33b includes an introduction path 412 through which a game ball rejected to enter the starting prize opening 402 by the starting prize winning shutter 405 is guided, and the introduction path 412 A re-entry path 414 is provided for guiding the guided game ball to a position above the starting prize winning port 402, and even if the ball entering the starting prize winning port 402 is once rejected, it is allowed to enter the starting prize winning port 402 again later. It is configured so that it can attempt to enter the ball.

Therefore, in the high ball winning state during the variable probability mode and the time shortening mode, among the game balls hit to the right aiming at entering the starting winning hole 402 of the second starting winning device 33b, it enters the starting winning hole 402 The number of game balls to be played and the number of game balls to be regulated by the start prize winning shutter 405 and ejected from the discharge opening 411 to the outside of the second start prize winning device 33b without entering the start prize winning port 402. In terms of ratio, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the start winning opening 402 can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the high-entering state (if the player continues to hit to the right), the starting prize-winning shutter 405 is kept at the open position almost all the time, so almost all of the game balls hit to the right start. The ball is entered into the winning hole 402 .

As a result, the game ball shot into the game area to enter the starting winning hole 402 can be efficiently entered into the starting winning hole 402, and the ball launched aiming at the starting winning hole 402 can enter the game ball. It is possible to reduce the useless balls that do not reach the limit as much as possible, and to suppress the situation that it is necessary to shoot many game balls in order to enter the start winning opening 402. - 特許庁As a result, the burden on the player is reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to progress the game (in this example, even if one ball is paid out to the start winning hole 402, Regardless, in the high ball entry state, the game can be played without substantially reducing the number of game balls on hand), and by efficiently entering the game ball into the start winning opening 402, the game can be played. You can make it progress quickly (the suspension of the variable display will not be cut off, and the tempo of the variable display can be increased).

In general, when the start winning shutter 405 is at the open position, the game ball is shot at a timing that reaches the second start winning device 33b, and when the start winning shutter 405 is at the closed position, the second It is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the starting winning hole 402 by performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching game balls at the timing leading to the starting winning device 33b. On the other hand, even if there are players who execute such technical operations and players who do not, and the number of game balls entering the second start winning device @ is the same per predetermined time, There is concern that a difference in the number of shot game balls will occur, and in the long run, there is a risk that a relatively large difference will occur in the total number of game balls acquired by the player. Furthermore, in the development of the pachinko machine 10, etc., the design is made based on the actual situation in the game hall etc. The payout rate) is designed to include the portion of the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players who perform the technical operations increases, the probability of winning a winning lottery or the like is lowered, or various types of game balls are paid out, in order to prevent the payout rate from becoming too favorable to the players. There is a tendency to reduce the possibility that the game ball will reach the winning hole and enter the ball, and there is a risk that the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation will be increased. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of unfairness between the players who perform the technical operations and the players who do not.

In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the second start prize winning device 33b when the start prize winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball enters the start prize winning port 402. Since there is a possibility that the game ball will hit, even if the game ball is continuously shot, the generation of useless balls that do not enter the start winning opening 402 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (virtually eliminate) the difference in game balls obtained between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical disparity between players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness between players who do not perform the technical operations (not knowing, not doing well, or intentionally not performing). can. In addition, even for a player who always plays games while being cautious about losing money if the above technical operations are not performed, the game can be played without worrying about such things. , the game can be progressed more comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second starting prize winning device 33b, on the upstream side of the starting prize winning port 402, there is provided a guide table 407 that guides the game ball to the starting prize winning port 402 from a substantially constant direction, and in the game area. A game nail or accessory provided on the upstream side of the second starting prize winning device 33b is configured to guide the game ball struck to the right to the guide table 407. As shown in FIG. As a result, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball are adjusted before the game ball reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402, and the moving direction and movement of the game ball entering the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 are adjusted. Speed irregularities can be reduced. Therefore, when the starting prize winning shutter 405 is at the closed position, the game ball rejected by the starting prize winning shutter 405 from entering the starting prize winning port 402 is allowed to enter the lead-in path 412 and the re-entry path 414, An opportunity is provided for the game ball to reach the upper position of the starting winning hole 402 at a later timing, and the effect of improving the probability of the ball entering the starting winning hole 402 can be further ensured.

Furthermore, since the start winning shutter 405 is configured to slide in the front and back direction, it is possible to have a configuration in which the game ball enters the start winning opening 402 by the falling operation, and the ball enters the starting winning opening 402 smoothly. A ball can be achieved. In addition, the game ball can be guided to the lead-in path 412 by the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405 . That is, when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the starting winning shutter 405 can guide the game ball to the lead-in path 412, so the movable type for guiding the game ball to the lead-in path 412 Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration, suppress an increase in size, and suppress an increase in cost.

In addition, for example, when the starting winning shutter extending back and forth is rotated upward to open the starting winning opening 402, a game ball thought to have entered the starting winning opening 402 is launched into the starting winning shutter. It is possible to avoid situations such as being bounced off. Furthermore, for example, in a configuration in which the starting winning shutter extending back and forth is rotated downward to open the starting winning opening 402, even when a large amount of game balls fall on the starting winning shutter at once and the starting winning shutter opens, It is possible to avoid a situation in which a game ball enters the start winning opening 402 due to the opening even though it is not there.

In addition, when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position and extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface of the game ball, a relatively large burden is likely to be applied. By configuring the front end portion of the lower surface and the like to be supported by the opening peripheral portion of the starting prize winning opening 402, the burden on the base side of the starting prize winning shutter 405 can be reduced, and the root portion of the starting prize winning shutter 405 can be reduced. It is possible to prevent a situation such as breaking on the side. In addition, a reinforcing rib 409 is provided on the lower surface side of the starting winning shutter 405 to improve the strength of the starting winning shutter 405 and prevent damage to the starting winning shutter 405 when a game ball collides. can do.

In addition, when the second variable winning device 32b is open, the state of the big win or the state of the small win is a low ball winning state, and it is difficult to win the ball-entering support lottery, the normal pattern fluctuates for a long time, and the ball-entering state is low. Even if you win the support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is in an open state for a short time, etc., so the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is almost closed, and most of the game balls It goes through an introduction path 412 and a re-entry path 414 . On the other hand, for example, if the second variable winning device 32b is on the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device of the game ball for the amount that the game ball passes through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 The approach to 32b is delayed. In particular, in the re-entry route of the game ball from the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414, even if the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 However, if the re-entry route intersects, the game balls come into contact with each other on the starting winning shutter 405 which is in the closed position above the starting winning opening 402, and the residence time becomes longer. Therefore, the second variable winning device 32b may make it difficult for the game ball to enter. In this respect, by arranging the second variable winning device 32b on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second variable winning device 32b. Furthermore, by reducing the number of game balls that enter the second starting prize winning device 33b (the balls are prevented from entering the starting prize winning port 402 by the starting prize winning shutter 405), the burden on the starting prize winning shutter 405 can be reduced. can. In addition, it is possible to avoid the congestion of the game balls in the second starting prize winning device 33b during the jackpot state and the flow to be degraded, and the player does not have to visually recognize such an unsightly aspect. .

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment will be described below. The second embodiment is characterized by the second variable prize winning device 32b, and the characteristic portion will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted, and the same member names and member numbers will be used.

The second variable winning device 32b includes a mounting plate 431 attached to the front side of the game board 30, and a large winning opening 432 (see FIG. 42 a ball receiving member 433 forming a ball receiving member 433 (see FIG. 42), a rectangular flat plate-shaped large winning prize shutter 434 as an opening/closing member for opening and closing the large winning prize port 432, and a large winning prize opening solenoid 435 (FIG. 42) for opening and closing the large prize winning shutter 434. see). Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the mounting plate 431 is formed with a communication hole 436 that allows passage of a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 432. to the rear side of the game board 30 (discharge passage portion 217). The count switch 223b is provided so as to be able to detect game balls passing through the winning path 437. As shown in FIG. Also, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening 432 corresponds to the specific winning opening.

Now, as shown in FIG. 42, the big prize winning shutter 434 of the second variable prize winning device 32b of the present embodiment is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction. When the large winning opening solenoid 435 is in a non-excited state, the large winning shutter 434 protrudes toward the game area to close the large winning opening 432 . On the other hand, when the solenoid 435 for the big winning opening is in the illustrated state, the big winning shutter 434 slides so as to be positioned behind the front surface of the mounting plate 431, and the big winning opening 432 is opened. ing.

Also, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position in which the second variable winning device 32b is closed, the big winning shutter 434 regulates the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 432, but this is not the case. Since the big winning shutter 434 of the embodiment extends back and forth, the regulated game balls are placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 . As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, at least the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 is slightly downwardly inclined to the right. Furthermore, the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 has no step at least in the horizontal direction, and is a flat surface in this example. Therefore, winning to the large winning opening 432 is restricted by the large winning shutter 434 in the closed position, and the game ball placed on the upper surface of the large winning shutter 434 is guided by the upper surface of the large winning shutter 434 and moves to the left. It will be done.

In addition, when the big winning shutter 434 is set to the open position in a state where a game ball is placed on the big winning shutter 434 at the closed position, all the game balls on the big winning shutter 434 at that time are placed downward. It is designed to win a prize at the big prize opening 432 .

The upper edge of the left wall portion of the ball receiving member 433 is at the same height as the left side of the top surface of the big prize shutter 434 or at a position lower than the big prize shutter 434 . The game ball that has reached the left side of is discharged to the left of the second variable winning device 32b. Furthermore, the upper edge of the front wall portion of the ball receiving member 433 (dropout prevention means) is positioned above the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is positioned above the big winning shutter. It is designed not to be located ahead of 434.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the game ball is guided to the right end side of the second variable winning device 32b by the game nail or accessory positioned upstream of the second variable winning device 32b. It has become so. In other words, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position, the game ball that has moved to just above the second variable winning device 32b falls to the right, which is the part on the upstream side of the big winning shutter 434 that tilts to the lower left. is configured to Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position, the game ball reaching the second variable winning device 32b rolls from the right side of the big winning shutter 434 to the left side.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 is relatively gentle (for example, 1 degree to 9 degrees), and the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 can be moved relatively slowly to the left. Become. Furthermore, the width of the entrance of the big prize winning opening 432 of this embodiment is configured to be as large as possible (for example, 100 mm to 135 mm), so that a game ball resting on the top surface of the big winning prize shutter 434 in the closed position can be held for a relatively long time. It is placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 .

Further, unlike the second start-up winning device 33b of the first embodiment, the second start-up winning device 33b of the present embodiment has a shape called a general electronic tulip. That is, a pair of vane members 438 are provided adjacent to both the left and right sides of the start winning opening into which game balls can enter. In the present embodiment, a game nail is disposed at a position directly above the start winning opening of the second start winning device 33b, and when the blade member 438 is in the closed position extending vertically, (the game nail There is no room for the game ball to pass between the blade member 438 and the start winning opening is closed, making it impossible to enter the ball into the starting winning opening. On the other hand, by displacing the blade member 438 to the open position where it opens outward, the game ball can enter the starting winning hole.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the second start-up winning device 33b is arranged on the upstream side of the game area (lower right area) than the second start-up winning device 33b. When the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state, most of the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting prize winning device 33b. In addition, when the second start-up winning device 33b is in the closed state, the game ball moving to the downstream side of the second start-up winning device 33b without entering the second start-up winning device 33b is the second variable winning device 32b. It has a configuration (arrangement of game nails arranged in the game area, relative positional relationship between the second starting prize winning device 33b and the second variable prize winning device 32b, etc.) that facilitates ball entry. In this embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b (large winning opening) constitutes a specific winning opening, and the large winning shutter 434 constitutes an opening/closing member and a time-lag passing opportunity providing means.

As described in detail above, according to the second embodiment, when the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is in the closed position, the game ball that reaches the second variable winning device 32b is closed by the big winning shutter 434. , the winning to the big winning opening 432 is regulated, and it rolls on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 as it is. When the big winning shutter 434 is set to the open position, the game ball rolling on the big winning shutter 434 enters the big winning opening 432 . Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is at the open position, it is possible to wait for the timing when the big winning shutter 434 is next opened in a state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 432 . In particular, in the present embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the big prize shutter 434, that is, the width in the horizontal direction, which is the moving direction of the game ball placed on the big prize shutter 434, is configured to be as long as possible, and the inclination is relatively gentle. A game ball guided to the upper surface of the large winning shutter 434 stays on the upper surface of the large winning shutter 434 as long as possible unless the large winning shutter 434 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the case in which the game ball hit to the right is discharged from the out port 36 without entering the big winning port 432 during the big winning state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, and the big winning. The game ball shot to the game area to enter the hole 432 can be efficiently entered into the big winning hole 432.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, even if the opening time of the big winning shutter 434 is relatively short, the game ball on the big winning shutter 434 can enter the big winning opening 432 . That is, game balls are put on the big winning shutter 434 when the big winning shutter 434 is closed, and all of them can enter the big winning opening 432 by opening the big winning shutter 434 briefly. Therefore, it is possible to intensively enter a predetermined plurality of game balls without lengthening the total opening time of the big winning shutter 434.例文帳に追加For example, game balls are accumulated on the big winning shutter 434 during the interval of the big winning state, and at the same time as the round starts, the big winning shutter 434 is opened to make the game balls enter the big winning opening 432 at once (instantaneously). It is also possible that the round end condition (for example, 8 wins) is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency.

In addition, the large winning shutter 434 in the closed position for blocking the large winning opening 432 of the second variable winning device 32b extends back and forth, and when the large winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the game ball is pushed downward. By moving it, it is made to win a prize in the big prize opening 432 . For this reason, for example, the movement and reaction of the game ball until it enters the big winning opening 432 is more difficult than the big winning shutter extending up and down and moving the game ball backward to enter the big winning opening. get faster. Therefore, by opening the big winning shutter 434 from the closed position, the game balls that have been restricted from entering the big winning opening 432 by the big winning shutter 434 can enter the big winning opening 432 relatively quickly. can be done.

In addition, the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b is pushed to the right of the upstream side of the big winning shutter 434 that inclines to the lower left by the game nail or the accessory that is arranged on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b. It is designed to be guided to the part of As a result, the action effect of making the game ball stay on the big winning shutter 434 for as long as possible can be achieved more reliably.

Furthermore, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state must support the lower surface side of the game ball, which is a heavy burden when catching the game ball that has fallen. In this regard, by arranging the second variable winning device 32b on the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b as in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b It is possible to reduce the number of game balls that move toward, and as a result, the burden on the big winning shutter 434 can be reduced.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43, focusing on the second starting prize winning device 33b, which is a characteristic part. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted, and the same member names and member numbers will be used.

The second variable prize winning device 32b of the third embodiment is basically the same as the second variable prize winning device 32b of the first embodiment, and includes a base plate 401, a starting prize winning port 402 (not shown in FIG. 43), A guide table 407 and a starting winning shutter 405 are provided. However, the lead-in path 412 and the re-entry path 414 are omitted, and when the starting prize winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball once dropped on the starting prize winning shutter 405 is discharged to the discharge opening 411 as it is. It's like

Now, in this embodiment, the guide table 407 is provided with a switching plate 451 that changes its state between an open state that allows the game ball to pass through to the start winning opening 402 side and a closed state that restricts the passage. A rotating shaft 452 is provided on one long side of the switching plate 451 , and the rotating shaft 452 is provided so as to extend back and forth near the tip edge of the guide base 407 . A motor 453 (other driving means may be used) is connected to the rotating shaft 452 on the back side of the base plate 401 .

The switching plate 451 of this embodiment is closed while the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner, and is open when the symbols are stopped. That is, when the starting winning shutter 405 of the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed position during the variable display of normal symbols, even if the game ball moves to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402, it wins the starting winning opening 402. Since it is impossible, the game ball is dammed upstream of the start winning opening 402.例文帳に追加Then, when winning in the ball entry support lottery, the variable display of normal symbols is stopped and displayed, and the switching plate 451 is opened, so that the game balls blocked by the switching plate 451 are released. , the ball will be entered into the opened start winning opening 402 . In addition, when the ball is not won in the ball-entering support lottery, the start-up winning shutter 405 is naturally not opened, so that the ball is discharged from the discharge opening 411 .

In addition, a housing recess 455 is formed adjacent to the rear of the guide table 407 in the second starting prize winning device 33b. In other words, when the number of game balls blocked by the switching plate 451 in the closed state exceeds a certain amount, the game balls are guided to the receiving recess 455 . The bottom surface of the housing recess 455 is inclined slightly downward toward the guide base 407 . In addition, in the present embodiment, the switching plate 451 constitutes a time-staggered passing opportunity imparting means (stopper).

As described in detail above, according to the third embodiment, when the starting winning shutter 405 of the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed position, the game ball that reaches the guide table 407 moves the guide table 407 as it is. Even if it jumps out to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402, it cannot enter the starting winning opening 402 because it is blocked by the starting winning opening shutter 405 in the closed position. In such a case, according to this embodiment, instead of allowing the game ball that has fallen to the guide table 407 to reach the upper position of the start winning opening 402 at normal timing, the game ball reaches the upper position of the starting winning opening 402. By delaying the arrival timing as much as possible, when the starting winning shutter 405 is not in the closed position, that is, when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the open state, the game ball reaches the upper position of the starting winning opening 402. Can be configured. In particular, in this embodiment, at the timing of the stop display of the variable display of the normal symbols, the switching plate 451 that has blocked the game balls with the guide table 407 is opened to allow the game balls to flow down. In the ball-entering mode, the starting prize-winning shutter 405 is almost at the open position at this timing, and the blocked game ball almost enters the starting prize-winning opening 402 . Therefore, the action effect of efficiently entering the starting winning hole 402 with the game ball shot into the game area to enter the starting winning hole 402 is surely achieved.

Also, here, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. That is, the second start-up winning device 33b of this aspect example is provided with a bypass passage 456 adjacent to the back side of the guide table 407 . The detour passage 456 has an entrance 457 and an exit 458 that are connected to the guide base 407 , and the entrance 457 is connected to a portion on the upstream side of the guide base 407 from the exit 458 .

Further, the switching plate 459 is also provided in this embodiment, and the switching plate 459 of the present embodiment is arranged so that the rotating shaft 460 extends vertically near the boundary between the entrance 457 and the exit 458 of the detour passage 456. An open state in which the game ball moving on the guide table 407 is guided to the downstream side of the guide table 407 as it is, and a closed state in which the game ball moving on the guide table 407 is guided to the entrance 457 of the bypass passage 456. configured to be changeable. When the switching plate 459 is in the open state, the game ball dropped to the upstream side portion of the guide table 407 goes straight down the guide table 407 and moves to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 .

On the other hand, when the switching plate 459 is in the closed state, the game ball that has fallen to the upstream side of the guide table 407 passes through the detour passage 456 and then moves from the guide table 407 to the position above the start winning opening 402. will have to move. That is, the time from when the game ball falls to the guide table 407 to when it reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402 is delayed. Also in this example, the switching plate 459 is closed while the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner, and is open when the normal symbol display is stopped. In this embodiment, the switching plate 459 and the detour 456 constitute the time-staggered passing opportunity providing means, and the switching plate 459 constitutes the route changing means.

As described above, even in this aspect example, when the start prize winning shutter 405 of the second start prize winning device 33b is in the closed position, the timing is slightly shifted (delayed a little) and the game ball is started and the winning prize opening is opened. By constructing it so as to reach the upper position of 402, the possibility of winning the game ball in the start winning opening 402 can be increased.

(Fourth embodiment)
Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 55, focusing on the second starting prize winning device 33b, which is a characteristic part. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted, and the same member names and member numbers will be used.

In the fourth embodiment, the configuration other than the second start-up prize device 33b is the same as in the first embodiment, and the arrangement of the second start-up prize device 33b is also the same as in the first embodiment. The winning device 33b is arranged downstream of the second variable winning device 32b in the game area.

As shown in FIGS. 47, 48, 50, etc., the second starting prize winning device 33b includes a base plate 471 attached to the game board 30 and a first starting prize winning device serving as a first specific prize winning port and a second specific prize winning port. The opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473, the first shutter 474 as the first opening/closing member that opens and closes the first starting winning opening 472, and the second shutter as the second opening/closing member that opens and closes the second starting winning opening 473. 475. Furthermore, a start winning switch 224b is provided corresponding to each of the first start winning port 472 and the second starting winning port 473. In the present embodiment, the first starting winning port 472 and the second starting winning port 473 In either case, it is assumed that the second starting prize winning device 33b has won a prize, and is treated in the same way (the second variable display is suspended).

In addition, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are configured to be slidable back and forth, and protrude into the game area to close the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 (FIG. 48, FIG. 48). 50 etc.) and an open position (see FIGS. 49, 51 etc.) for leaving the game area and opening the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. there is Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, in this embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are integrated and operated by one solenoid 476 (the closed position in FIG. 52 and the open position in FIG. 53). open position). As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first shutter 474 and the opening/closing operation of the second shutter 475 are configured to be exactly the same, and one of the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 is opened. It is configured so that there is no situation where one is closed off the other. In the present embodiment as well, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are set to the open position when winning the ball-entering support lottery (opening/closing lottery) performed by the main controller 261 (opening/closing lottery means). It's becoming It should be noted that the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 may be individually provided and configured to be operated by individually provided solenoids.

As shown in FIG. 47 and the like, the first starting winning opening 472 is positioned to the right and above the second starting winning opening 473 . Further, in the present embodiment, the second starting prize winning device 33b includes a communication passage 477 provided between the first starting prize winning port 472 and the second starting prize winning port 473. As shown in FIG. The communication passage 477 is inclined downward to the left while meandering back and forth. Further, the upper surfaces of the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are also inclined downward to the left. In this embodiment, when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position when the game ball moves to the upper position of the first starting winning opening 472, the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 472 is the first. While being regulated by the first shutter 474 , the game ball is guided to the alternative communication passage 477 by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 .

The game ball that has entered the communication path 477 is guided to a position above the second start winning opening 473 while meandering along the communication path 477 . At this time, if the second shutter 475 is in the open position, the game ball wins the second start winning opening 473 . On the other hand, if the second shutter 475 is in the closed position, the game ball is restricted from entering the second starting winning port 473 by the second shutter 475, and is guided leftward by the upper surface of the second shutter 475, It will be discharged to the outside of the second starting prize winning device 33b. In this embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the connecting passage 477 constitute a ball-entering opportunity providing means. Also, in the present embodiment, the connecting passage 477 corresponds to the second specific ball entry route.

In this embodiment, the connecting passage 477 meandering back and forth receives the game ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 at the front position of the base plate 471, and then moves the game ball to the rear position of the base plate 471. After moving to the front position of the base plate 471, furthermore, after moving the game ball to the rear position of the base plate 471 again, the second start winning opening 473 in front of the base plate 471 It guides the game ball to the upper position.

Also, a roof member 478 is provided to block the upper side of the communication passage 477 so that game balls cannot enter the communication passage 477 from the middle. Furthermore, the roof member 478 extends to a position above the second starting prize winning port 473, whereby basically, only game balls that pass through the communication passage 477 win the second starting prize winning port 473. It is configured in such a way that it cannot

On the right side of the first starting prize opening 472 (first shutter 474), there is provided a receiving table 479 that is inclined downward to the left and connected to the upper surface of the first shutter 474 that is in the closed position. The game ball that has fallen to the receiving table 479 is guided to the first start winning opening 472 side. Further, a canopy portion 481 extending forward from the base plate 471 is provided above the boundary portion between the first shutter 474 and the receiving table 479 . The eaves portion 481 is configured such that the upper surface is inclined left and right so that game balls do not stay on the upper surface.

In addition, although not shown, the game ball that reaches the second start-up winning device 33b is basically Generally, the user is guided to the eaves portion 481 and the receiving table 479 on the right side of the eaves portion 481 . Furthermore, between the eaves portion 481 and the roof member 478, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed. be. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, a first starting prize opening 472, a second starting prize opening 473, a roof member 478, a reception table 479, and a front wall portion 480 that closes the front of the eaves portion 481 are provided. The roof member 478, reception table 479, eaves portion 481, and front wall portion 480 are integrally formed of a transparent resin material.

In addition, for example, in the roof member 478, the upper part of the connecting passage 477, which is connected to the first start winning opening 472 and guides the game ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 to the rear of the base plate 471 As for the part covering the , if it is configured so that there is a possibility that the game ball may fall on the upper surface, the upper surface of the part may be configured to tilt downward slightly toward the right side.

In addition, the second startup winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment is provided with an assist winning opening 482 that protrudes forward from the base plate 471 on the upper right side of the eaves portion 481 . When game balls are detected by a detection switch (not shown) that counts the game balls entering the assist winning opening 482, three game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加Due to the presence of the assist winning hole 482, the number of winning holes into which the game ball enters when the game ball is shot toward the right side area (right hitting) increases. Therefore, in the time reduction mode, the game can be played without substantially reducing the number of game balls (even if the number of prize balls entering the second starting prize winning device 33b is less than that of the first starting prize winning device 33a). It can be carried out. Furthermore, in the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, more game balls are obtained than when there is no assist winning port 482 (or when the winning ball enters the first variable winning Although it is less than the device 32a, it is possible to make up for it, or even make it more than that.

Between the assist winning opening 482 and the eaves portion 481, a gap through which a game ball can pass is formed. Most or all of the game balls flowing into the lower right region are guided to the upper position of the assist winning opening 482 by a game nail or the like. Then, the game ball that did not enter the assist winning opening 482 falls and is guided by the eaves part 481 and the receiving table 479 and moves to the upper position of the first starting winning opening 472 .

As described in detail above, according to the fourth embodiment, when the first shutter 474 of the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the closed position, the first shutter 474 is in the closed position. As a result, the game balls that failed to enter the first start prize winning port 472 are guided to the second start prize winning port 473 . For this reason, the game ball that could not enter the first start prize winning port 472 is given an opportunity to try to enter the second start prize winning port 473, and the game ball is transferred to the second start prize winning device 33b ( It is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will enter the first start prize winning port 472 and the second start prize winning port 473). Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the second start prize winning device 33b, the number of game balls entering the second start prize winning device 33b and the number of game balls reaching the second start prize winning device 33b It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of game balls that enter the second start prize winning device 33b to the number of game balls that do not enter the second start prize winning device 33b. As a result, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the second starting prize winning device 33b can be efficiently entered into the second starting prize winning device 33b, and is shot aiming at the second starting prize winning device 33b. It is possible to reduce the useless balls that are hit but not entered as much as possible, and to suppress the situation that many game balls need to be shot to enter the second start winning device 33b. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls required to progress the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls can efficiently enter the second start winning device 33b. , the game can be smoothly progressed (the game can be played without reducing the number of balls in hand and without interrupting the variable display (so that the variable is started immediately after the stop display)).

Also in the present embodiment, even if the game ball is shot at a timing that reaches the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position, the game ball is second start. Useless balls that do not enter the second starting winning device 33b (first starting winning port 472 and second starting winning port 473) even if the game ball is continued to be launched because there is a possibility that the ball will enter the winning device 33b will be suppressed. Therefore, the difference in the number of game balls obtained between the player who performs the technical operation of measuring the timing of shooting the game ball explained in the first embodiment and the player who does not perform the technical operation is reduced. (virtually eliminated). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical difference between players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness between players who do not perform the technical operations (not knowing, not doing well, or intentionally not performing). can. In addition, even for a player who always plays games while being cautious about losing money if the above technical operations are not performed, the game can be played without worrying about such things. , the game can be progressed more comfortably.

Further, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball are adjusted by the receiving table 479, the eaves part 481, and furthermore, the game nail, the accessory, etc., which are arranged on the upstream side of the first start winning opening 472. It is For this reason, it is possible to reduce irregularities in the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball entering the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 . Therefore, when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position, the game ball is sent to the communication passage 477 by the first shutter 474, and the effect of improving the probability of entering the second start winning hole 473. can be made even more certain.

In addition, by sliding the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 in the front-rear direction, the game ball can enter the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 by the falling operation. Above, for example, when closing the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 with a rotating shutter, the game ball thought to have entered the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473, It is possible to avoid such a situation that the shutter is launched to the outside and is flipped off.

In addition, the game ball that has reached the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 is guided to the communication passage 477 by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 that is in the closed position. As a result, when the first shutter 474 for opening and closing the first start winning opening 472 is in the closed position, the game ball can be guided to the communication passage 477 by the first shutter 474. There is no need to separately provide a movable member for guiding to 477, and it is possible to simplify the configuration, suppress an increase in size, suppress an increase in cost, and the like.

Furthermore, only when the game ball passes through the communication passage 477, it is possible to enter the second start winning opening 473, and when the game ball is guided to the communication passage 477 by the first shutter 474, are configured to allow entry only. In other words, there is a possibility that the game ball that failed to enter the first starting winning port 472 enters the second starting winning port 473, but the game ball that failed to enter the second starting winning port 473 is the first Since there is no possibility that the ball will enter the starting winning opening 472, for example, if the game ball is configured to be able to enter the second starting winning opening 473 side directly without going through the first shutter 474 etc. ( Since there is a case of one chance instead of two chances), the possibility of the game ball entering the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 decreases. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the order of trying to enter the ball into the first start winning hole 472 first and, if that fails, to try to enter the second starting winning hole 473 is to be complied with. Thus, the effect of improving the possibility of the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b (the first starting prize winning port 472 and the second starting prize winning port 473) can be achieved more reliably.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is arranged upstream of the game area from the second startup winning device 33b. That is, regarding the second starting prize winning device 33b of the present embodiment, it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to enter the second starting prize winning device 33b and be ejected. More specifically, on the upstream side of the second start-up winning device 33b, the first shutter 474 in the closed position is rectified by a game nail, accessories, etc., and further rectified by the canopy portion 481 and the reception table 479. , through the connecting passage 477 meandering back and forth, and passing downstream while changing the course in the direction perpendicular to the second shutter 475 in the closed position, finally the second start winning device A game ball is discharged from 33b. Therefore, when the second start-up winning device 33b is upstream of the second variable winning device 32b, the winning of the game ball in the big winning state or the small winning state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened. may not go smoothly (particularly, as in this example, almost all of the game balls passing through the right game area (excluding game balls that win the second variable winning device 32b) are the second starting winning device 33b It becomes more conspicuous in the case of a configuration in which the user is guided to the right side), but in this embodiment, such problems can be eliminated. It should be noted that the second start winning device 33b of this example takes a longer time (longer distance) between the first start winning port 472 and the second starting winning port 473 than connecting them linearly. Since the communication passage 477 is provided to guide the game ball from the side of the first starting prize winning device 33a to the side of the second starting prize winning device 33b, such action and effect are further exhibited.

In addition, in the jackpot state in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened, the number of game balls falling to the second start prize winning device 33b can be reduced, and the second variable prize winning device 32b that receives the falling game balls can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the burden on the starting prize winning device 33b (the canopy portion 481, the receiving table 479, the first shutter 474, etc.) and the risk of damage.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(a) In the above-described first embodiment, from the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 as a specific point, through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414, the game ball reaching the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again The entry route is configured to intersect at a position above the starting prize winning opening 402 (corresponding to the left part of the starting prize winning shutter 405), but is configured so as not to cross (not to pass through the same place twice). You may In this case, the game ball that has jumped out from the guide table 407 to the position above the starting prize opening 402 collides with the game ball that has jumped out again to the position above the starting prize opening 402 via the re-entry path 414, and bounces. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid the situation in which the starting prize winning port 402 is not won. For example, the game ball falls from the guide table 407 to the left side of the starting prize winning shutter 405, which is on the introduction path 412 side, and from the re-entry path 414, the game ball falls to the right side of the starting prize winning shutter 405, which is on the discharge opening 411 side. may be configured to be derived to

In the above embodiment, although the re-entry route intersects, it is located above the starting winning opening 402, so even if the game balls collide at that position, the two game balls that likely to enter. Therefore, as compared with the case where the re-entry route crosses at a position other than the upper position of the starting prize winning port 402, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the game balls hinder each other from winning the starting prize winning port 402.例文帳に追加

(b) In the first embodiment, when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the starting winning opening 402 passes through the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414. However, one game ball may be configured to be able to access the upper position of the start winning opening 402 three times or more. For example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the starting winning opening 402 and the starting winning shutter 405 are configured in a stepped manner. That is, the starting winning shutter 405 is composed of a vertically extending connecting plate 491, an upper closing plate 492 extending leftward from the upper side of the connecting plate 491, and a lower closing plate 493 extending rightward from the lower side of the connecting plate 491. , and the starting prize opening 402 is also shaped accordingly.

Furthermore, in addition to the re-entry path (first entry path 494) located on the back side of the starting prize winning shutter 405, a re-entry path (second entry path 495) is also formed on the front side of the starting prize winning shutter 405. - 特許庁Then, when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, if the game ball is guided from the guide table 407 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402, the game ball falls to the upper closing plate 492 of the starting winning shutter 405. and enters the first plunge path 494 via the introduction path 412 . The game ball passing through the first rush path 494 jumps out to a position above the starting winning opening 402 , more specifically, to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 492 of the starting winning shutter 405 . Also at this timing, if the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball traverses the upper closing plate 492 forward and enters the second plunge path 495 . The game ball passing through the second entry path 495 jumps out to a position above the starting winning opening 402 , more specifically, to a position corresponding to the lower closing plate 493 of the starting winning shutter 405 . At this timing, if the start winning shutter 405 is opened, the game ball enters the start winning opening 402, and if the start winning shutter 405 is closed, the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the lower closing plate 493. , and discharged from the discharge opening 411 .

In addition, since the second start-up winning device 33b of the aspect example does not fit in the space between the game board 30 and the glass frame unit 137, the game board 30 is shaved to arrange the introduction path 412 further behind, The platform 407 is configured to project the game ball obliquely backward.

(c) In the above-described first embodiment, at least one of the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 may be provided with a driving force applying means for applying driving force to the game ball. For example, a roller whose upper part is exposed from the lower surface of the introduction path 412 and a motor for rotating the roller may be provided. Further, for example, a moving means such as a belt conveyor may be installed in the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 .

In addition, the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 in the closed position above the start winning opening 402 is returned to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again. It is necessary to incline upward in the separating direction side, and the game ball runs up the lead-in path 412.例文帳に追加

(d) A buffer that reduces the impact when a game ball is received, for example, the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405 of the first embodiment and the opening peripheral portion of the starting winning opening 402 that receives the lower surface of the starting winning shutter 405 A material (rubber, relatively soft thermoplastic elastomer, etc.) may be installed. In this case, damage and collision noise can be suppressed. It should be noted that the cushioning material can also be applied to the big winning shutter 434 of the second embodiment and the starting winning shutter 405 of the third embodiment.

(e) In the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is embodied in a configuration in which the game ball is moved to the winning opening for a predetermined time in a state where it can be won immediately. It is also possible to apply such a structure to the starting ball entry means used for a predetermined lottery such as the second starting winning device 33b. In this case, more game balls can be entered into the starting ball entering means in a short period of time without lengthening the opening time, and prize balls given when entering the starting ball entering means can be reduced. Even so, since the number of balls entering the starting ball entering means increases (the ratio of entering balls to the total number of shots increases), it is possible to prevent or suppress the speed at which the number of held balls decreases excessively. Furthermore, by increasing the number of balls entering the starting ball-entering means, the chances of the lottery increase, and it is possible to improve the interest by receiving more lotteries and increasing the chances of performance. Also, it is possible to create new playability.

(f) In the second embodiment, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is configured to slide back and forth. It may be configured to open and close the big winning opening that opens back and forth, or may be configured to be rotatable. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the game ball that reaches the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state is placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and near the right end, which is one end in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434. Although it is configured to move from the part to the left end, which is the other end in the longitudinal direction, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and the large winning opening is opened immediately after the large winning shutter 434 is opened. It is sufficient that the game ball can be moved as long as possible in such a state that the ball can enter 432 .

For example, the second variable winning device 32b may be configured as shown in FIG. That is, the big prize winning shutter 434 of the second variable prize winning device 32b of FIG. , and is rotatable about an axial direction extending left and right along the upper edge portion when in the closed position. In addition, a receiving member 801 is provided for receiving a game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position. The receiving member 801 includes a receiving plate 802 extending forward from the lower edge of the big prize opening 432 and a front plate 803 extending upward from the front edge of the receiving plate 802, and is integrally formed of a transparent resin material. ing.

At least the upper surface (receiving surface) of the receiving plate 802 is slightly downwardly slanted leftward (toward the back of the paper surface of FIG. 58), and is further slightly downwardly slanted rearward. Therefore, the game ball received by the receiving member 801 moves to the left on the receiving member 801 while maintaining a state of contact with the big winning shutter 434 at the rear. When the big winning shutter 434 is set to the open position, the game ball leaning against the big winning shutter 434 while moving the receiving member 801 is released from the support of the big winning shutter 434 and tilts backward. Guided by the receiving plate 802, the ball enters the large winning opening 432 on the far side. Although the game ball is received by the receiving member 801, if the big winning shutter 434 is not opened before the game ball reaches the left end of the receiving member 801, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the second variable winning device 32b. be.

Even when the second variable winning device 32b is configured as described above, when the second variable winning device 32b is opened such that the game ball is leaning against the big winning opening shutter 434, the big winning opening 432 immediately opens. Since the game ball can be moved along the longitudinal direction of the big winning opening shutter 434 while it is possible to enter the ball, the second embodiment increases the possibility of the ball entering the second variable winning device 32b. Basically the same effect as that is exhibited.

(g) In the second embodiment, the game ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is moved from near one end in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434 toward the other end. Although it is configured to maximize the time on the big winning shutter 434, it is not limited to such a configuration. The upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 may be configured to move a distance longer than the width of the big prize shutter 434 in the longitudinal direction.

For example, in the second variable prize winning device 32b shown in FIG. 56, by appropriately forming a plurality of convex portions on the upper surface of the special prize winning shutter 434, a game ball moving on the upper surface of the special prize shutter 434 meanders. A guide groove 811 is provided as an application means. In this embodiment, the game ball entering the second variable winning device 32b is moved to the maximum position of the guide groove 811 of the big winning shutter 434 by a game member such as a game nail arranged on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b. It is configured to be guided to an upstream position near the right end portion 812 (wider than the other portions).

Further, as shown in FIG. 56(b), of the mounting plate 431 for mounting the second variable prize winning device 32b to the game board 30, a portion above the accommodation opening 408 for making the big prize winning shutter 434 appear and disappear (hereinafter referred to as The upper base portion 813) has its front surface slanted upward and rearward. The lower end of the upper base portion 813 (the upper edge of the accommodation opening 408) is positioned below the central portion of the game ball moving on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434. When the moving game ball moves backward, the upper base part 813 comes into contact with the part below the center of the game ball. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced to the rearward open position, the game ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 is caught in the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811. Even if the game ball moves backward and is pressed against the upper base portion 813 side, the game ball is guided by the front surface of the upper base portion 813 and displaces upward while moving the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 relative to the ball. It is designed to get over the target and enter the big winning hole 432 .

As described above, the meandering guide groove 811 is formed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and while making the game ball on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 meander, the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434 is increased. By moving a long distance, the state in which the game ball can enter the big winning opening 432 when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position can be maintained for a longer time. Therefore, in the period in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state a plurality of times, the game ball is released at such timing that it reaches the second variable winning device 32b when the second variable winning device 32b is in the closed state. Even if the game ball is launched, if the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the game ball stays as much as possible while moving to a position where it can enter the second variable winning device 32b, It is possible to wait for the next timing when the second variable winning device 32b is opened. As a result, the effect of the second embodiment, such as increasing the possibility of the ball entering the second variable prize winning device 32b, can be achieved more reliably.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is made to meander in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular big winning shutter 434 that is long in the left and right direction. It is moved downstream in the longitudinal direction by a distance longer than the width of the special winning shutter 434 in the longitudinal direction. In general, the front-rear width of the game area defined by the game board 30 and the transparent glass unit 137 arranged in front thereof is narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball (about 11 mm). For this reason, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter is made to meander in a direction intersecting the short side direction of the substantially rectangular big winning shutter, or the central side of the substantially circular big winning shutter. If an attempt is made to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the big prize shutter while rotating toward the outer circumference from the top, the front and rear width of the big prize shutter must be wider than the front and rear width of the game area. There is a possibility that a point behind the front surface of the game board 30 must be selected as a suitable starting point for the game ball moving on the big winning shutter. In this case, there is a possibility that the configuration may become complicated. In this regard, if the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is merely meandering in a direction crossing the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular big winning shutter 434, the front and rear width of the big winning shutter 434 is The game ball placed on the big prize shutter 434 can be moved by a distance longer than the width of the big prize shutter 434 in the longitudinal direction without being wider than the front-rear width of the game area. Therefore, such a problem can be eliminated.

Also, for example, instead of forming unevenness on the big prize winning shutter 434, a projection projecting inwardly from the peripheral edge of the big prize winning opening 432 may be formed above the big prize winning shutter 434 in the closed position. constitutes the ball-entering opportunity giving means, and the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 may be guided by the protrusion and moved while meandering, but in that case, the big winning shutter Even if 434 is displaced to the open position, the protrusion remains in a state of protruding inwardly from the periphery of the opening of the big prize opening 432 . Therefore, since there is a possibility that the ease of entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 432 may be lowered, by forming the guide groove 811 directly in the big winning prize shutter 434 as in the above embodiment, If the big prize winning shutter 434 is displaced to the open position, naturally the guide groove 811 as a whole moves out of the game area, so that such a problem can be eliminated.

Further, the front surface of the upper base portion 813 of the mounting plate 431, which may come into contact with the game ball resting on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position, is inclined upward and backward, and the big winning shutter is closed. Even if the game ball placed on 434 is caught on the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 of the big winning shutter 434 moving to the rearward open position and is pressed against the upper base portion 813, the upper base portion 813 It can ride over the big prize shutter 434 (the step of the guide groove 811 of it) relatively smoothly. Therefore, when the big prize winning shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced rearward to the open position, the large prize winning shutter 434 is placed between the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 and the upper base portion 813 . It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is pressed so as to be pinched, and the game ball bounces off due to the force. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is set to the open position, the game ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 can be more surely entered into the big winning opening 432, and damage to the second variable winning device 32b or the like can be prevented. can be suppressed.

As a modification of the configuration in which the ball can enter the big winning opening 432 as soon as the big winning shutter 434 opens, for example, as shown in FIG. A small protrusion 805 may be provided on the upper surface of the plate 802 as a ball-entering opportunity imparting means. Due to the presence of the small projection 805, the moving speed of the game ball moving on the receiving member 801 is suppressed. Therefore, as soon as the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the game ball stays in a position where it can enter the big winning opening 432 for as long as possible, and the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b is increased. The action and effect of increasing the temperature are further exhibited.

Further, for example, the upper surface of the big prize shutter is formed in a substantially arc shape with a low center and high left and right sides, and a game ball placed on the big prize shutter rolls back and forth to the left and right. It may be configured to drop. In addition, when adopting the configuration (the configuration in which the game ball reciprocates left and right on the big winning shutter corresponds to the ball entry opportunity granting means), the game ball rolling on the big winning shutter wins the big prize. Since it must be possible to spill forward or backward from the shutter and discharge it to the outside of the second variable winning device, a hole is formed in the game board 30, and the game ball is second variable before and after the big winning shutter. It is necessary to form a passage for discharging to the outside of the winning device.

In addition, for example, a large winning shutter that can be displaced between a closed position that closes the large winning opening 432 that opens forward and an open position that displaces downward from the closed position to open the large winning opening 432. 434, a position where the receiving member 801 emerges upward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802 and forms a guide groove 811 on the receiving plate 802, and a retracted position where the receiving member 801 retreats downward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802. A possible guide member may be provided so that when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the guide member is also in the retracted position.

(h) In the second embodiment, the shape of the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is not particularly limited. For example, a rotating shaft extending to the left and right and a plurality of vane-shaped opening/closing plates extending in a centrifugal direction from the rotating shaft are provided. It may be configured such that the mounted game ball wins in the big winning opening 432 by rotating the blade type opening/closing plate thereon downward.

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, when the starting winning shutter 405 of the second variable winning device 32b is set to the open position, all the game balls placed on the big winning shutter 434 enter the big winning opening 432. However, it is not limited to such a configuration, and at least the possibility of entering the ball should be increased. For example, the big winning shutter 434 may protrude upstream from the big winning opening 432 and extend to the upper right. Further, instead of extending the big prize winning shutter 434, a start stand such as the reception board 479 of the fourth embodiment is provided adjacent to the upper end of the big prize winning shutter 434 in the closed position. Alternatively, the game ball may be passed through (dropped) to the start table and then guided to the big winning opening 432 side. In this case, variations in speed, angle, etc. of the game ball entering the big winning opening 432 side can be suppressed, and damage to the big winning shutter 434 can be further suppressed. The start table may be configured to be more resistant to impact than the big prize shutter 434 (provided with means for softening the impact, or have high strength itself), or may be detachably configured and replaced. It may be possible.

(i) Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, a second variable winning device 32b may be configured. That is, the big prize winning shutter 434 of the second variable prize winning device 32b shown in FIG. A possible first shutter 821 is arranged above the first shutter 821 at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the first shutter 821, and is located above the big winning opening 432 across the first shutter 821. A second shutter 822 is provided which can be displaced back and forth between a closed position and an open position where the player exits from above the big winning opening 432 . The first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position at the same time, and both are integrally formed in this embodiment.

The second shutter 822 is slightly downwardly inclined to the left. Also, the first shutter 821 is slightly downwardly inclined to the right. Furthermore, the first shutter 821 has a lateral width larger than that of the second shutter 822, and the left end portion is located to the left of the left end portion of the second shutter 822 by more than the diameter of the game ball. is formed with a stopper 823 protruding upward from the left end. In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball entering the second variable winning device 32b is moved to the upstream side of the second shutter 822 by a game member such as a game nail arranged on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b. It is configured to be guided to a position near the right end.

Then, the game ball falling on the second shutter 822 in the closed position moves leftward on the second shutter 822 and falls from the left end. It lands near the left end of the first shutter 821 and moves to the right on the first shutter 821 this time. Further, when the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 in the closed position are displaced to the open position, almost all the game balls placed on the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 enter the big winning opening 432. The ball will be entered. In addition, the game ball that has moved on the first shutter 821 to the right end of the first shutter 821 is discharged to the outside from the second variable winning device 32b.

When adopting the above configuration, the position and speed of the game ball falling (entering) the first shutter 821 can be limited to some extent by the second shutter 822, and the movement of the game ball on the first shutter 821 can be restricted. can be suitable. In addition, not only the game ball placed on the first shutter 821 in the closed position, but also the game ball placed on the second shutter 822 in the closed position, the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 move to the open position. As a result, the ball enters the big winning hole 432, so that the same effect as the second embodiment, such as efficiently entering the game ball into the big winning hole 432, can be achieved more reliably. .

Incidentally, in the above embodiment, the game nail may be installed at a position directly below the second shutter 822 . However, when the second shutter 822 in the closed position is in the open position, the game nail is arranged so that the game ball that was on the second shutter 822 in the closed position can enter the big winning hole 432. In addition, it is arranged so as not to hinder the movement of the game ball moving on the first shutter 821 in the closed position. When adopting such a configuration, when the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are in the open position, the shutter can be moved from a position above the second shutter 822 without any contact with a game member such as a game nail on the way. When a game ball jumps directly into the big winning hole 432 from a relatively high position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the impact when receiving the game ball becomes relatively large. Also, it is possible to configure such that the lower surface of the second shutter 822 is supported by such a game nail.

(j) In the above-described second embodiment, a game ball is guided (falls) from the upper left position toward the lower right by a game nail, accessory, or the like on the top surface of the big winning shutter 434 that inclines to the lower left. It may be configured as In this case, the game ball is dropped in the direction opposite to the tilt direction of the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and the (initial) speed of the game ball moving on the big winning shutter 434 can be made as slow as possible.

(k) In the above-described third embodiment, the installation position of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459) is not particularly limited, and basically there is no problem as long as it is upstream of the start winning opening 402. FIG. However, if the distance between the switching plate 451 and the start winning opening 402 changes, the timing of switching between the open state and the closed state of the switching plate 451 naturally changes, so there may be changes in the relative position, shape, etc. For example, it is necessary to make a corresponding design based on simulation or the like.

(l) In the third embodiment, a synchronizing means for synchronizing the opening/closing timing of the starting winning shutter 405 and the operation timing of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459) may be provided. The synchronizing means may be, for example, an interlocking mechanism that mechanically interlocks, or a control means that opens and operates under the same opening/operating trigger and opening/operating conditions, or It may be a control means for measuring the opening timing of the starting prize winning shutter 405 and synchronizing the timing.

(m) The second start-up winning device 33b of the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b of the second embodiment, and the second start-up winning device 33b of the third embodiment may be used in combination. It is possible.

(o) In the fourth embodiment, the shape of the second starting prize winning device 33b is not particularly limited. The configuration may be such that game balls flow from left to right. In addition, the communication passage 477 may also have a configuration in which, for example, the game ball flows down while being swirled.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b has a first start winning port 472 and a second starting winning port 473. For example, one starting winning port ( There is one starting prize winning switch 224b for detecting entering balls, and the right end and left end of the entrance are configured so that game balls can enter, and the intermediate position is closed with a communication passage 477, and the entry is possible. Each part may be configured to be openable and closable by a shutter. It should be noted that the number of start winning openings provided in the second start winning device 33b may be three or more.

(p) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the same privilege is granted regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start prize-winning port 472 or the second start prize-winning port 473 of the second start prize-winning device 33b. may be configured differently. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, even if a game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b, it is discharged from the second starting prize winning device 33b without winning any of the starting prize winning ports 472, 473. In the case of a configuration in which there is a possibility of winning a prize at a later timing, winning the second starting prize opening 473 that has the possibility of winning a prize at a later timing is more generous (larger/more) than winning the first start prize opening 472. It may be configured to be given. Benefits include, for example, a large number of game balls paid out based on the detection of the starting winning switch 224b, a high probability of winning the lottery performed based on the detection of the starting winning switch 224b, and the detection of the starting winning switch 224b. There are a plurality of start winning switches 224b for detecting game balls that have won the second start winning port 472 (variation display of special symbols). are suspended), there is a start winning switch 224b and a through gate switch 225 for detecting the winning game ball in the second start winning port 472 (variation display of special symbols and variation display of normal symbols are suspended ) and the like. In addition, the game ball can reach the second start winning opening 473 only when the first starting winning opening 472 is closed by the first shutter 474, and the game ball passes through the first shutter 474, Since the ball cannot be entered unless the second shutter 475 is opened before passing through the second shutter 475, a privilege given based on the ball entering the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 are different, the privilege given based on the ball entering the second start winning port 473 (in terms of the difficulty of entering the ball or simply in terms of the fun of the appearance) will be given to the player. should be more favorable to

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b, the game ball always wins in one of the plurality of starting prize openings (or when the game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b during a predetermined period , the game ball always wins in one of the multiple starting winning ports), it is possible for the game ball to win at a timing earlier than the starting winning port where there is a possibility of winning at a later timing. It may be configured such that a more generous award is given to a winning entry in a start winning opening with a higher probability. Further, when there are three or more starting prize-winning ports of the second starting prize-winning device 33b, the prize of winning to the starting prize-winning port at the intermediate point may be increased (large). In addition, the starting prize-winning opening with a larger (larger) winning privilege is positioned (at a more conspicuous position) on the player side than the starting prize-winning opening with a smaller (smaller) prize. is desirable.

It should be noted that the configuration of the second startup winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment may be embodied in another object, such as the second variable winning device 32b. In other words, in this case, there are a plurality of large winning openings in the second variable winning device 32b, and shutters for opening and closing the respective large winning openings, communication passages connecting between the large winning openings, and the like allow the shutters to open the large winning openings on the upstream side. The game balls rejected to win a prize are sequentially guided to a large prize opening on the downstream side. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the starting winning device is configured to guide the game ball to another winning opening when the ball fails to enter a predetermined winning opening as in the above-described fourth embodiment, Or, in addition, it is also possible to apply it to a variable winning device.

(q) In addition, in the fourth embodiment, speed reduction means may be provided to delay the passing speed of the game ball passing through the communication passage 477 . For example, install a windmill that pushes away the blades with a game ball to rotate it, or a roller that rotates in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball passes (for example, is eccentric and can send the game ball in the opposite direction) There is no phase, the game ball that has entered the communication passage 477 always moves to the downstream side and reaches the upper position of the second start winning opening 473) may be installed.

(r) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening and closing patterns of the first variable prize winning device 32a and the second variable prize winning device 32b of various jackpot types, etc. are not particularly limited. It can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning lottery is configured to change, but the winning probability does not change (constant), and the period of the high winning state given after the end of the jackpot state (variable The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns are prepared for the number of times.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting prize winning device 33a and the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b are separate. is referred to, and the allocation of the jackpot type is changed, but it may be the same.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, two starting winning devices 33a and 33b are provided for performing variable display of special symbols based on the detection of a game ball that has entered, and variable winning devices that are opened in the case of a big win state or a small win state are provided. Two devices 32a and 32b are provided, and one through gate 34 is provided for performing variable display of normal symbols based on the detection of passing game balls, but the number and arrangement of these are particularly limited. It can be set for each model, not for each model.

(s) In the above embodiment, after the variable display (first variable display) based on the entry of the game ball into the already reserved first start prize winning device 33a, the second start prize winning device 33b reserved The second variable display is prioritized by changing the reserved order such that the variable display (second variable display) based on the entry of the game ball is digested earlier than the first variable display. However, it may be configured to be consumed in the reserved order regardless of whether it is the first variable display or the second variable display.

(t) In the above embodiment, the main processing (see FIG. 9) is followed by the normal processing (see FIG. 10) in the main controller 261, but the configuration is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value, which is performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal processing in the above embodiment, is performed. The processing performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In addition, as the processing of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitor circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and if the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure is performed. A configuration can be mentioned in which a flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the processing of step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing as in the above embodiment.

(u) In the above embodiment, the hit/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is overwritten with information as to whether or not a big win will occur. is not limited to For example, in addition to the winning random number storage area, a storage area for storing information as to whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be provided for the execution area and each of the reservation areas of the special variation reservation area, or the special variation reservation may be provided. Separately from the area, a storage area corresponding to the execution area of the special variable reservation area and each reservation area may be provided, and information as to whether or not a big win state occurs may be stored in the storage area. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the type of the jackpot may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, it is confirmed again whether the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, etc., and the processing corresponding to the confirmation processing is performed. can be configured to

(v) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from the said embodiment. For example, movable means ( a variable ball entry means comprising a feather member), a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball that has entered a specific area, and a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means is detected. specific ball entry detection means (condition fulfillment detection means), special start means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and detection of a game ball that has entered the special start means and a main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means and the non-specific ball entry means A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are awarded to the player in either case, and the main control means activates the variable ball entry means for the first time based on detection by the special start detection means. or the variable ball entry means is opened for a second time longer than the first time, or the variable winning means is opened for a specified number of A lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a big winning state by repeating this process for a specified number of times with one round until a game ball enters the ball, and when a small winning state is won in the winning lottery, a small winning state is generated, It may be applied to a gaming machine in which a jackpot state is generated when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery or when a specific ball-entering detecting means detects a jackpot. In addition, in addition to pachinko machines, there are also arranged ball machines, various types of game machines such as majang ball similar to them, slot machines as reel-type game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines. You may

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting device enters a special starting means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not a winning state is generated, and the result of the lottery is displayed on a variable display device. (See, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-154110).

Also, in general, a pachinko machine has a so-called electronic tulip that changes between an open state in which a game ball can or is easily entered and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. A variable ball entry device called an attacker or the like is provided. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player.

Further, such a variable ball-entering device is designed to be opened based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, but many of them are opened and closed periodically multiple times based on the establishment of the predetermined condition once. Therefore, using the fact that the variable ball entry device opens and closes periodically, a game ball is shot at a timing that reaches the variable ball entry device when the variable ball entry device is in the open state, By performing a technical operation such as refraining from shooting game balls at the timing when the ball device is closed and the variable ball entry device is reached, the number of game balls that do not enter the variable winning means is reduced, and eventually, , the total number of game balls to be finally acquired can be increased.

However, there are players who perform such technical operations and players who do not perform such technical operations, or players who do not do well, and it is rare that a relatively large difference occurs in the total number of game balls finally obtained. do not have.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a sense of unfairness due to a technical difference between players.

Means A1-1. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a specific prize winning opening into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
A closure that is placed at a specific point on a specific ball entry route through which a game ball entering the specific winning hole (always) passes, and that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning hole an opening/closing member capable of changing between a state and an open state that allows ball entry or facilitates ball entry,
When the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the game ball (which cannot pass the specific point to the specific winning port side due to the opening and closing member being in the closed state) is provided with time-staggered passage opportunity providing means for providing an opportunity to pass the specific point at another (later than now) timing.

When the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific point to the specific winning hole side is low (virtually none), and the possibility of entering the specific winning hole is low (virtually non-existent). On the other hand, according to this means A1-1, when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the specific point passes to the specific winning hole side due to the opening/closing member being in the closed state. A game ball that cannot be played can be given an opportunity to pass a specific point at a different timing (at a later timing than now). For this reason, even if the game ball is made to reach the specific point as usual, the game ball is specified as compared with the case where the game ball is made to reach the specific point at the timing when the specific point is closed by the opening and closing member in the closed state. By reaching the point, the possibility that the opening/closing member is in the open state at that time is increased. To make the game ball reach the specific point at a timing different from usual (at a timing after a predetermined time from now). and, in turn, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific point to the specific winning hole side and enters the specific winning hole. Therefore, among the game balls shot aiming at entering the specific winning hole, the number of game balls that pass through the specific point and enter the specific winning hole As a result, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening can be increased in proportion to the number of game balls excluded to the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. As a result, the game ball shot into the game area to enter the specific winning hole can be efficiently entered into the specific winning hole, and although the ball is shot aiming at the specific winning hole, it does not enter the game ball. Wasted balls are reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which a large number of game balls need to be shot in order to enter a specific winning hole. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to progress the game, and the game balls can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, thereby increasing the number of game balls. to proceed smoothly (when embodying it in an electric chew, the tempo of the variable display can be increased, and the suspension of the variable display can be maintained, and when embodying it as an attacker, the round progresses smoothly can)

Also, in general, when the opening/closing member is in an open state, a game ball is shot at a timing that reaches a specific point, and when the opening/closing member is in a closed state, a game ball is shot at a timing that reaches a specific point. By performing a technical operation such as refraining from firing, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the specific winning hole. On the other hand, there are players who execute such technical operations and players who do not, and in the long run, there will be a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls obtained. Furthermore, in the development of game machines, designs are made based on the actual situation in game halls, etc. ), the design includes the part of the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players who perform the technical operation increases, the winning probability is lowered or the game is played at various winning ports from which game balls are paid out, in order to prevent the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the players. There is a tendency to lower the possibility that the ball will reach and hit the ball, and there is a risk that the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation will become greater. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of unfairness between the players who perform the technical operations and the players who do not.

In this regard, in this means, even if a game ball is shot at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening/closing member is closed, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the specific winning hole. , even if the game balls are continuously shot, generation of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning hole is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (virtually eliminate) the difference in game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical difference between players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness between players who do not perform the technical operations (not knowing, not doing well, or intentionally not performing). can. In addition, even for a player who always plays games while being cautious about losing money if the above technical operations are not performed, the game can be played without worrying about such things. , the game can be progressed more comfortably.

Means A1-2. An opening/closing lottery means for performing an opening/closing lottery to determine whether or not the opening/closing member should be opened based on a predetermined trigger,
The means A1-1 characterized by having a first state in which the opening/closing lottery is won with a first probability and a second state in which the opening/closing lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability. The game machine described.

According to the means A1-2, there are a second state in which the opening/closing member is opened relatively frequently and a first state in which the opening/closing member is not opened very often, so that the game is played aiming at the specific winning hole. It is possible to create a state in which the game can be smoothly progressed by hitting a ball and a state in which the progress of the game does not go smoothly even if the game ball is hit at a specific winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the hitting position of the game ball must be substantially changed, or to add inflection to the game state, thereby improving the game playability.

Incidentally, in the second state, almost all of the game balls shot aiming at the specific winning hole may enter the specific winning hole. In this case, the action and effect of suppressing the skill gap between players can be achieved more reliably. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which one game ball is paid out in response to one game ball entering a specific winning hole (as part of correcting the disparity by technical manipulation as described above), it is fired If the game ball does not enter the specific winning hole (assuming that the game ball basically does not enter the other winning holes), the number of game balls in hand will surely decrease, but in the second state If almost all of the game balls that are shot enter the specific winning hole, such a situation can be dramatically suppressed. Therefore, when the ball enters the specific winning hole, the number of paid-out game balls is one, and in the second state, it is possible to more reliably realize the game property such that the number of game balls in hand is not desired to be reduced as much as possible.

Means A1-3. A gaming machine according to means A1-1 or A1-2, characterized in that rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the specific point (opening/closing member).

According to the means A1-3, irregularities in the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball entering the specific point are eliminated by providing a straightening means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball before reaching the specific point. can be reduced. Therefore, when the opening/closing member is in the closed state by the time-lag passage opportunity giving means, the game ball is given an opportunity to reach the specific point at another timing, and the probability of the ball entering the specific winning hole is improved. Such action and effect can be made even more reliable. Incidentally, the rectifying means may be configured with accessories, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or may be a combination of a plurality of configurations.

Means A1-4. The opening/closing member has a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction,
The opening/closing member is closed by displacing the shutter to the closed position where the shutter protrudes into the game area, and the opening/closing member is opened by displacing the shutter to the open position where the shutter is withdrawn from the game area,
The game machine according to any one of means A1-1 to A1-3, further comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes.

According to the means A1-4, by sliding the shutter in the front-rear direction, the game ball can enter the specific winning hole by the action of falling, and the ball can enter the specific winning hole smoothly. can be realized. In addition, for example, when the shutter extending back and forth is rotated upward to open the specific winning hole, the game ball thought to have entered the specific winning hole is thrown outside as if it were launched by the shutter. Such situations can be avoided. Furthermore, for example, in a structure in which a shutter extending back and forth is rotated downward to open a specific winning hole, a large number of game balls fall on the shutter at once and the shutter is opened even though it is not the opening timing. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball enters a specific winning hole.

In addition, when the shutter is in the closed position, the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface of the game ball is likely to be subjected to a relatively large burden. By providing the member, it is possible to reduce the burden on the root side of the shutter, and prevent the shutter from breaking at the root side.

It should be noted that "a rib is formed on the rear surface side of the shutter". In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the game ball collides with the shutter. Further, it is also possible to provide a cushioning material for the shutter or a member that abuts and supports the shutter in the closed position. In this case, it is possible to reduce the shock when the shutter receives a game ball, and to suppress damage and collision noise.

Means A2-1. The time-lag passage opportunity providing means is an introduction path through which a game ball whose passage to the specific winning opening side of the specific point is restricted by the opening/closing member in a closed state (although it has reached the specific point) is guided. and a re-entry path for guiding a game ball that has entered the lead-in path to the specific point.

According to the means A2-1, although the game ball has reached the specific point, the opening/closing member is not yet opened, so after killing a little time, the game ball goes to the specific point again. can be derived. In other words, when the game ball first reaches the specific point, the opening/closing member was in the closed state, but after a predetermined period of time via the time-lag passage opportunity imparting means, at the timing when the game ball reaches the specific point again, the opening/closing member is closed. may be open. Therefore, even if the first try to pass the specific point fails, the same game ball can access the specific point multiple times, so that it can be tried again later. The above operation effect of efficiently entering the game ball launched into the game area into the specific winning hole can be reliably achieved. As a matter of course, if the opening/closing member is open when the game ball first reaches the specific point, the game ball passes the specific point and enters the specific winning hole at that stage. .

Means A2-2. The gaming machine according to means A2-1, wherein the game ball that has reached the specific point is guided to the lead-in path by the opening/closing member that is in a closed state.

According to the means A2-2, when the opening/closing member for opening/closing the route to the specific winning hole is in the closed state, the game ball can be guided to the lead-in path by the opening/closing member, so that the game ball is guided to the lead-in path. There is no need to separately provide a movable member for this purpose, and it is possible to simplify the configuration, suppress an increase in size, suppress an increase in cost, and the like. In this means, the opening/closing member in the closed state constitutes a part of the time-lag passing opportunity granting means for the game ball.

It should be noted that "the opening/closing member has a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction, and when the shutter is displaced to a closed position that protrudes into the game area, the opening/closing member is closed, and the shutter exits the game area. The opening/closing member is brought into the open state by being displaced to the open position. In this case, the game ball can enter the specific winning hole by the action of falling, and the game ball can be surely guided by the upper surface of the shutter in the closed position.

Means A2-3. The re-entry route of the game ball from the specific point to the specific point via the lead-in path and the re-entry path is configured so as not to intersect at least at points other than the specific point. The gaming machine according to means A2-1 or A2-2.

Means A2-3. It is possible to prevent the game balls from colliding head-on with each other in the middle of the re-entry route. Therefore, the game ball moving on the re-entering route can be more reliably guided to the specific point at the initial timing. Even if the game balls collide with each other at the specific point, if the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game balls pass through the specific point to the specific winning hole.

Means A2-4. a normal starting means configured so that a game ball moving in the game area can pass through or enter;
a special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
variable winning means capable of changing between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
normal starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means or entered the normal starting means;
a special starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special starting means;
variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery to determine whether or not to open the special starting means based on the detection by the normal start detection means;
a winning lottery execution means for performing a lottery lottery as to whether or not the variable winning means is to be opened based on the detection by the special start detection means;
The specific winning opening and the opening/closing member are applied to the special starting means,
There is a first state in which the ball entry support lottery is won with a first probability, and a second state in which the ball entry support lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability,
In a state in which the winner is won in the winning lottery and the variable winning means is in an open state, the support lottery is in the first state,
The gaming machine according to means A2-1 to A2-3, wherein the variable winning means is arranged upstream of the special starting means in the game area.

According to the means A2-4, in the state where the winner is won in the lottery and the variable winning means is in the open state, the support lottery is in the first game state, and the opening/closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. , Most game balls come to pass through the introduction path and the re-entry path. On the other hand, for example, if the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the approach of the game ball to the variable winning means is delayed as the game ball passes through the lead-in path and the re-entry path. In particular, in the re-entry route of the game ball from the specific point through the lead-in route and the re-entry route to the specific point again, if the re-entry route intersects even on the specific point, the game ball There is a possibility that the variable winning means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter due to contact with each other and a longer residence time in the special starting means. In this regard, by arranging the variable winning means upstream of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the variable winning means. Furthermore, by reducing the number of game balls that enter the special starting means (the ball is prevented from entering the specific winning opening by the opening/closing member) in the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, the load on the opening/closing member is reduced. can be reduced.

In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the game ball enters the variable winning means on the upstream side and flows to the special starting means side. Since the number of is reduced, it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the state in which a large number of game balls are entered in the special starting means and the flow is deteriorated.

Means A3-1. The opening/closing member includes a shutter that can be displaced between a closed position that prevents game balls from entering the specific winning hole and an open position that allows game balls to enter,
When the shutter is in the closed position, the game ball whose entry into the specific winning hole is restricted by the shutter moves along the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining a state of contact with the shutter. and
The shutter constitutes the time-lag passing opportunity granting means,
The gaming machine according to means A1, wherein when the shutter is at the open position, a game ball in contact with the shutter enters the specific winning hole.

According to means A3-1, when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the specific point is restricted from entering the specific winning hole by the shutter, but remains in contact with the shutter. While maintaining the state, it moves along the longitudinal direction of the shutter. Then, when the opening/closing member is opened, that is, when the shutter is opened, the game ball that has been in contact with the shutter (leaned or rested) passes through a specific point, and reaches a specific point. The ball will enter the winning slot. In this way, by maximizing the staying time of the game ball at the specific point, it is possible to wait for the timing when the opening/closing member is opened next in a state where the ball can enter the specific winning hole when the opening/closing member is opened. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described effect that the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning hole is efficiently entered into the specific winning hole.

Furthermore, even if the open time of the open/close member is relatively short, the game ball leaning against the shutter (for example, resting on it) can enter the specific winning hole. That is, for example, game balls can be put on the shutter when the shutter is closed, and all of them can enter the specific winning hole by opening the shutter for a short time. Therefore, a predetermined plurality of game balls can be intensively entered without lengthening the total opening time of the opening/closing member. For this reason, when the specific prize winning opening and the opening/closing member are embodied as an attacker that is opened when a winning lottery results in a special game state, the game balls accumulated in the shutter during the interval between rounds are released into the round. At the start, the attacker will enter the ball, and it is possible to improve the time efficiency. In addition, when it is embodied in an electric chew that is opened when winning the ball entry support lottery and entering the ball entry support state, it is possible to enter more game balls without extending the opening time. It becomes feasible, and by this, it is also possible to create new playability.

Means A3-2. The shutter is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, extends in the front-rear direction in the closed position, and has a longitudinal direction in the left-right direction,
The game according to means A3-1, wherein when the shutter is at the open position, a game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter enters the specific winning hole. machine.

According to the means A3-2, the shutter at the closed position for closing the specific winning hole extends back and forth, and when the shutter is at the open position, the game ball that loses the support of the shutter falls downward. It is designed to enter a specific winning mouth. For this reason, for example, the movement and reaction of the game ball until it enters the specific winning hole is faster than when the shutter extends vertically and moves the game ball backward to enter the specific winning hole. Become. Therefore, by changing the shutter from the closed position to the open position, it is possible to relatively quickly enter the game ball that has been restricted from entering the specific winning hole by the shutter.

Means A3-3. The game machine according to means A3-1 or A3-2, further comprising rectifying means for guiding game balls to an upstream portion of the shutter.

According to the means A3-3, by surely guiding the game ball to the part on the upstream side with respect to the shutter, the state in which the game ball is brought into contact with the shutter (the state in which the game ball rests on the shutter) is lengthened as much as possible. The action and effect will be exhibited more reliably.

Means A3-4. The game machine according to means A3-1 to A3-2, further comprising drop prevention means for maintaining a state in which the game ball is in contact with the shutter.

According to the means A3-4, it is possible to prevent the game ball from falling off from the upper surface of the shutter.

Means A3-5. The game machine according to any one of means A3-1 to A3-4, wherein small irregularities are formed on the upper surface of the shutter.

According to the means A3-5, when the opening/closing member is in the open position, it is possible to keep the state in which a ball can be entered into the specific winning hole for as long as possible.

Means A3-6. normal starting means configured to allow passage of game balls moving in the game area;
a special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
variable winning means capable of changing between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
normal starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means;
a special starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special starting means;
variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery to determine whether or not to open the special starting means based on the detection by the normal start detection means;
a winning lottery execution means for performing a lottery lottery as to whether or not the variable winning means is to be opened based on the detection by the special start detection means;
The specific winning port and the opening/closing member are adapted to the variable winning means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A3-1 to A3-5, wherein the variable winning means is arranged downstream of the special starting means in the game area.

As in the above means A3-1, the shutter of the opening/closing member in the closed state must support the game ball (especially when the shutter extends back and forth, it must support the bottom side of the game ball), The burden is large when catching a game ball that has fallen. In this respect, as in this means A3-6, by arranging the variable winning means on the downstream side of the special starting means, the number of game balls moving toward the variable winning means by the number of balls entering the special starting means is reduced. can be reduced, and as a result, the load on the shutter can be reduced.

Means A4-1. The staggered passage opportunity giving means is installed on the upstream side of the specific point on the specific ball entry route,
When the opening/closing member is in an open state or in a state substantially equivalent to an open state, the game ball reaches the specific point after a lapse of a first time after reaching the time-lag passing opportunity imparting means. The staggered passage opportunity granting means is opened,
When the opening/closing member is in a closed state or in a state substantially equivalent to a closed state, the time-staggered passage opportunity granting means is closed, and the game is played by the action of the time-staggered passage opportunity granting means in the closed state. The gaming machine according to means A1, characterized in that the ball reaches the specific point after a second time longer than the first time has passed after reaching the time-lag passing opportunity providing means.

When the opening/closing member is in the closed state, even if the game ball reaching the time-lag passing opportunity granting means flows down to the specific point as it is, it is blocked by the opening/closing member in the closed state and enters the specific winning hole. can't In such a case, according to the means A4-1, the opening and closing member is closed as much as possible by delaying the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific point instead of allowing the game ball to reach the specific point at normal timing. When not in the state, that is, when the opening and closing member is in the open state, the game ball can be configured to reach a specific point. Therefore, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described effect that the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning hole is efficiently entered into the specific winning hole.

It should be noted that the time required for the game ball to reach the specific point from the time-lag opportunity granting means varies depending on the distance between the specific point and the time-lag opportunity granting means. For this reason, for example, when the opening/closing member is simply in an open state, if the game ball reaches a specific point as it is with the time difference passage opportunity granting means opened, the specific point can be passed. I can't say for certain that they are compatible. For this reason, "when the opening/closing member is in a state substantially corresponding to an open state" and "when the opening/closing member is substantially in a state corresponding to a closed state" are defined as specific points, Considering the distance from the time-lag opportunity giving means, the opening and closing member will be in an open state by the time the game ball positioned in the time-lag opportunity giving means reaches a specific point. The purpose of this is to set the timing and period for closing the time-lag passing opportunity granting means for each model based on the simulation of the above.

Synchronization means may be provided for synchronizing the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing member and the operation timing of the time-lag passing opportunity granting means. The synchronizing means may be, for example, an interlocking mechanism for mechanically interlocking, or a control means for opening and operating under the same opening/operating trigger and opening/operating conditions. It may be a control means for adjusting the opening timing of the opening/closing member.

Means A4-2. According to means A4-1, the time-lag passage opportunity providing means includes a stopper capable of changing the state between a first state in which the game ball is stopped and a second state in which the game ball is passed without stopping. game machine.

According to the means A4-2, when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the game ball can be stopped upstream of the specific point. Therefore, by shifting the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific point, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball reaches and passes the specific point when the opening/closing member is opened.

Means A4-3. The gaming machine according to means A4-1, wherein the time-lag passage opportunity granting means includes route changing means capable of lengthening or shortening the distance of the route through which the game ball travels to reach the specific point. .

According to means A4-3, it is possible to delay the timing at which a specific point is reached by causing the game ball to go around longer than usual.

Means A4-4. support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery to determine whether the opening/closing member is to be opened;
variable display means for displaying a variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery;
When the variable display means is displaying a variable display, the time difference passing opportunity granting means is in a closed state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A4-1 to A4-3, wherein the time-staggered passage opportunity granting means is in an open state while the variable display is stopped and displayed on the variable display means.

According to the means A4-4, the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening in a situation where the game ball is likely to easily enter the specific winning opening, and the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening in a situation where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the timing of reaching the specific winning opening is shifted (later).

The means A2, A3, and A4 are basically considered to be used independently, but the means A2 is configured downstream of the specific point, and the means A3 is configured at the specific point, Since the means A4 is configured upstream of the specific point, it is possible to segregate them, and depending on the situation, it is possible to use them in combination.

Means B-1. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a specific prize winning opening into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
An opening/closing member capable of changing the state between an open state that allows a game ball to enter the specific winning hole and a closed state that makes it impossible to enter the game ball,
When the opening/closing member is in the closed state when the game ball reaches a first specific point at which the game ball can enter the specific winning hole when the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game ball is moved to the opening/closing member. is in the open state, the game machine is provided with a ball-entering opportunity providing means for guiding the player to a second specific point where a ball can be entered into the specific prize-winning opening.

According to the means B-1, when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, if the opening/closing member is in the open state, it is assumed that the game ball has reached the first specific point at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole. Also, if the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game ball is guided to the second specific point where the ball can enter the specific winning hole. For this reason, the game ball that failed to enter the specific winning hole is given an opportunity to try to enter the specific winning hole again, and the possibility of the game ball entering the specific winning hole is increased. can be done. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming to enter the specific winning hole, the ratio of the number of game balls that enter the specific winning hole and the number of game balls that do not enter the specific winning hole , the ratio of the number of game balls entering the specific winning hole can be increased.

Further, in this means, even if the game ball is shot at the timing when the opening/closing member is closed, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the specific winning hole, so even if the game ball is continuously shot, , the occurrence of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning hole is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (virtually eliminate) the difference in game balls obtained between a player who performs a technical operation such as a stop shot and a player who does not perform the technical operation.

Means B-2. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
A first specific prize winning port into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and a second specific prize winning port,
Arranged at a first specific point on a first specific ball entry route through which the game ball entering the first specific prize winning port (always) passes, and the game ball entering the first specific prize winning port a first opening/closing member that can change state between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to enter, and an open state that allows or facilitates entry;
Arranged at a second specific point on a second specific ball entry route through which the game ball entering the second specific prize winning port (always) passes, and the game ball entering the second specific prize winning port a second opening/closing member that can change its state between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to enter and an open state that makes it possible or easy to enter,
When the first opening/closing member is in the closed state, (because the first opening/closing member is in the closed state, the first specific point cannot be passed to the first specific winning opening side. ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a ball-entering opportunity providing means for guiding a game ball to the second specific ball-entering route.

When the first opening/closing member is in the closed state, the possibility of the game ball passing the first specific point to the first specific winning hole side is low (virtually none), and the ball is likely to enter the first specific winning hole. less (virtually none). On the other hand, according to this means B-1, when the first opening/closing member is in the closed state, the first specific point is moved to the first position due to the fact that the first opening/closing member is in the closed state. A game ball that cannot pass to the side of the first specific prize winning opening can be guided to the second specific ball entering route leading to the second specific winning opening. For this reason, the game ball that failed to enter the first specific winning hole is given an opportunity to try to enter the second specific winning hole, and the game ball enters the specific winning hole (first specific winning hole). and the second specific winning hole) can be increased. Therefore, among the game balls shot aiming at entering the specific winning hole, the number of game balls that pass through the specific point and enter the specific winning hole As a result, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening can be increased in proportion to the number of game balls excluded to the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. As a result, the game ball shot into the game area to enter the specific winning hole can be efficiently entered into the specific winning hole, and although the ball is shot aiming at the specific winning hole, it does not enter the game ball. Wasted balls are reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which a large number of game balls need to be shot in order to enter a specific winning hole. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls required to progress the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, thereby increasing the number of game balls. (When embodying it as an electric chew, the number of rotations of the variable display can be increased, and when embodying it as an attacker, the round can be progressed smoothly).

Also, in general, when the opening/closing member is in an open state, a game ball is shot at a timing that reaches a specific point, and when the opening/closing member is in a closed state, a game ball is shot at a timing that reaches a specific point. By performing a technical operation such as refraining from firing, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the specific winning hole. On the other hand, there are players who execute such technical operations and players who do not, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls obtained. Furthermore, in the development of game machines, designs are made based on the actual situation in game halls, etc. ), the design includes the portion of the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players who perform the technical operation increases, the winning probability is lowered or the game is played at various winning ports from which game balls are paid out, in order to prevent the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the players. There is a tendency to reduce the possibility that the ball will reach and hit the ball, and there is a risk that the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation will be increased. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of unfairness between the players who perform the technical operations and the players who do not.

In this regard, in this means, even if the game ball is shot at such timing as to reach the first specific point when the first opening/closing member is in the closed state, the game ball enters the second specific winning hole. Since there is a possibility, the occurrence of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning holes (the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole) is suppressed even if the game balls are continuously shot. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (virtually eliminate) the difference in game balls obtained between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical disparity between players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness between players who do not perform the technical operations (not knowing, not doing well, or intentionally not performing). can. In addition, even for a player who always plays games while being cautious about losing money if the above technical operations are not performed, the game can be played without worrying about such things. , the game can be progressed more comfortably.

As a matter of course, if the first opening/closing member is in an open state when the game ball first reaches the first specific point, the game ball passes through the first specific point at that stage to obtain the first specific winning. The ball will enter the mouth. Also, the timing at which the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member are opened and the timing at which they are closed may be the same. Furthermore, the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole have the same role. The number of game values (prize balls) to be paid out may be the same. A lottery table may be used, and as a special game state advantageous to the player, the first specific prize winning port and the second specific prize winning port are opened with the lapse of a specified time or the number of balls entered as an upper limit. In the case of a configuration in which a plurality of round periods, which are periods, are provided with an interval period that is closed, regardless of whether the ball enters the first specific winning opening or the second specific winning opening, the round It may be counted as the number of incoming balls that is measured up to the upper limit of the period. Incidentally, by connecting the first opening and closing member and the second opening and closing member so as to operate integrally, it is possible to share the drive means for operating them, or to separately drive and control the members. It is not necessary to perform control such as measuring the timing of synchronization, as in the case of synchronizing, and the simplification of the configuration and control can be achieved.

Means B-3. An opening/closing lottery means for performing an opening/closing lottery to determine whether or not the opening/closing member should be opened based on a predetermined trigger,
Means B-1 characterized in that there is a first state in which the opening/closing lottery is won with a first probability, and a second state in which the opening/closing lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability; or The gaming machine described in B-2.

According to the means B-3, there are a second state in which the opening/closing member is opened relatively frequently and a first state in which the opening/closing member is not opened very often, so that the game is played aiming at the specific winning hole. It is possible to create a state in which the game can be smoothly progressed by hitting a ball, and a state in which the game does not progress even if the game ball is aimed at a specific winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the hitting position of the game ball must be substantially changed, or to add inflection to the game state, thereby improving the game playability.

Incidentally, in the second state, almost all of the game balls shot aiming at the specific winning hole may enter the specific winning hole. In this case, the action and effect of suppressing the skill gap between players can be achieved more reliably. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which one game ball is paid out in response to one game ball entering a specific winning hole, if the fired game ball does not enter the specific winning hole (other Assuming that the ball is basically not entering the winning hole), the number of game balls on hand will surely decrease, but almost all the game balls shot in the second state enter the specific winning hole. Such a situation can be dramatically suppressed by adopting such a configuration. Therefore, when the ball enters the specific winning hole, the number of paid-out game balls is one, and in the second state, it is possible to more reliably realize the game property that the number of game balls in hand is not desired to be reduced as much as possible.

Means B-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3, further comprising rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball on the upstream side of the first specific point.

According to the means B-4, before reaching the first specific point, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball entering the first specific point are adjusted by providing a straightening means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball. can be reduced. Therefore, when the first opening/closing member is in the closed state, the ball-entering opportunity providing means sends the game ball to the second specific ball-entering route to improve the probability of entering the second specific winning hole. It is possible to further ensure the action and effect.

Incidentally, the rectifying means may be configured with accessories, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or may be a combination of a plurality of configurations.

Means B-5. said opening/closing member (corresponding to means B-2, at least said first opening/closing member) comprises a shutter slidable in the front-rear direction;
The opening/closing member is closed by displacing the shutter to the closed position where the shutter protrudes into the game area, and the opening/closing member is opened by displacing the shutter to the open position where the shutter is withdrawn from the game area,
The game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4, further comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes.

According to the means B-5, by sliding the shutter in the front-rear direction, the game ball can enter the specific winning hole by the action of falling. In the case of closing, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a game ball thought to have entered the specific prize winning opening is thrown up to the shutter and is bounced to the outside.

In addition, when the shutter is in the closed position, the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface of the game ball is likely to be subjected to a relatively large burden. By providing the member, it is possible to reduce the load on the root side of the shutter and prevent the shutter from breaking at the root side.

It should be noted that "a rib is formed on the rear surface side of the shutter". In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the game ball collides with the shutter. Further, it may be possible that "a cushioning material is provided at a portion of the opening/closing member that comes into contact with the game ball and restricts passage of the game ball through the specific point". In this case, the shock when the shutter receives the game ball can be reduced.

Means B-6. The game ball that reaches the first specific point when the opening and closing member is in the closed state is in the closed state to the second point (the second specific ball entry route corresponding to the means B-2) The game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, wherein the game machine is guided by the opening and closing member.

According to the means B-6, when the opening/closing member for opening/closing the first specific point (the first specific ball entry route to the first specific winning hole) is closed, the opening/closing member moves the game ball to the second specific point ( Since it is possible to guide the game ball to the second specific ball entry route), there is no need to separately provide a movable member for guiding the game ball to the second specific point (second specific ball entry route), simplifying the configuration. , suppression of size increase, suppression of cost increase, and the like. In addition, in this means, the (first) opening/closing member in the closed state constitutes the ball-entering opportunity granting means.

Means B-7. The second specific point (corresponding to the means B-2, the second specific ball entry route) is configured to be able to enter only when the game ball is guided by the ball entry opportunity granting means. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-6, characterized by:

There is a possibility that a game ball that could not enter the (first) specific winning opening at the first specific point may enter the (second) specific winning opening at the second specific point, but at the second specific point (second 2) Since there is no possibility that a game ball that could not enter the specific winning hole enters the (first) specific winning hole at the first specific point, for example, directly without going through the ball-entering opportunity granting means When the game ball is configured to be able to enter the (second) specific winning opening at the second specific point, the possibility of the game ball entering the specific winning opening is reduced. In this regard, according to the means B-7, first, the ball is attempted to enter the (first) specific winning hole at the first specific point, and if that fails, the (second) specific winning at the second specific point. It is possible to make the players comply with the order of trying to enter the ball into the mouth, and it is possible to more reliably achieve the effect of improving the possibility of the ball entering the specific winning hole.

Means B-8. a normal starting means configured so that a game ball moving in the game area can pass through or enter;
a special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
variable winning means capable of changing between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
normal starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means or entered the normal starting means;
a special starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special starting means;
variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery to determine whether or not to open the special starting means based on the detection by the normal start detection means;
a winning lottery execution means for performing a lottery lottery as to whether or not the variable winning means is to be opened based on the detection by the special start detection means;
The specific winning opening and the opening/closing member are applied to the special starting means,
There is a first state in which the ball entry support lottery is won with a first probability, and a second state in which the ball entry support lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability,
In a state in which the winner is won in the winning lottery and the variable winning means is in an open state, the support lottery is in the first state,
The gaming machine according to means B-1 to B-7, wherein the variable winning means is arranged upstream of the special starting means in the game area.

According to the means B-8, in the state where the variable winning means is opened after winning the lottery, the support lottery is in the first game state, and the opening/closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. , Most of the game balls pass through the second specific ball entry route and are discharged outside the special starting means without entering the second specific prize winning opening. On the other hand, for example, if the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the game ball passes through the special starting means (the first specific ball entry route and the second specific ball entry route), The approach to the ball's variable winning means is delayed. In this regard, by arranging the variable winning means upstream of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the variable winning means.

In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the game ball enters the variable winning means on the upstream side and flows to the special starting means side. Since the number of is reduced, it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the state in which a large number of game balls are entered in the special starting means and the flow is deteriorated.

C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting device enters a special starting means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not a winning state should be generated, and the result of the lottery is displayed on a variable display device. (See, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-154110).

Generally, a pachinko machine has a state change between an open state in which a game ball can be entered or is easily entered and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter. A variable ball entry device is provided that gives a predetermined number of prize balls by hitting the ball.

By the way, in a special game state in which the variable ball entry device is in an open state, even if game balls are continuously shot at a constant rhythm, various game members such as game nails are arranged in the game area. There is concern that the opening timing of the variable ball-entering device and the timing at which the game ball reaches the variable ball-entering device do not mesh well, resulting in a situation in which it is difficult to enter the ball.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of allowing a game ball to enter a variable ball entering device more efficiently. be.

Means C-1. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
A variable ball entry device that changes the state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can or is easily entered and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter,
The variable ball entry device is
a specific prize winning opening into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
A shutter that can be displaced between a closed position that disables entry of game balls into the specific winning hole and an open position that allows entry of the game ball,
a ball-entering opportunity imparting means for displacing a game ball, whose entry into the specific winning hole is restricted by the shutter when the shutter is in the closed position, in a prescribed direction while maintaining a state of contact with the shutter; prepared,
A game machine characterized in that a game ball in contact with the shutter enters the specific winning hole when the shutter is in the open position.

According to means C-1, when the variable ball entry device is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the variable ball entry device is restricted from entering the specific winning port by the shutter, but the shutter is released as it is. While maintaining the abutment state, it moves in the specified direction. Then, when the shutter is in the open position and the variable ball entry device is in the open state, almost all of the game balls that are in contact with (lean against or rest on) the shutter enter the specific winning hole. The ball will be entered. In this way, by maximizing the staying time of the game ball at the position (state) where the ball enters the specific winning hole when the shutter is in the open position, when the variable ball entry device is in the open state, it is specified. It is possible to wait for the timing when the variable ball entry device is next opened while maintaining the state of the game ball that can be entered into the winning hole. Therefore, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning hole can be efficiently entered into the specific winning hole.

Furthermore, even if the open time of the variable ball entry device is relatively short, the game ball leaning (for example, resting on) the shutter can be entered into the specific winning hole. . That is, for example, as long as game balls are put on the shutter when the shutter is closed, all of them can enter the specific winning hole with a short opening of the shutter. Therefore, a predetermined plurality of game balls can be intensively entered without lengthening the total open time of the variable ball entry device. For this reason, when the specific prize winning opening and the opening/closing member are embodied as an attacker that is opened when a winning lottery results in a special game state, the game balls accumulated in the shutter during the interval between rounds are released into the round. At the start, the attacker will enter the ball, and it is possible to improve time efficiency. In addition, when it is embodied in an electric chew that is opened when winning the ball entry support lottery and entering the ball entry support state, it is possible to enter more game balls without lengthening the opening time. It becomes feasible, and it is possible to create new gameplay.

In addition, in this means, even if the game ball is shot at the timing when the variable ball entry device is closed, the game ball may enter the specific winning hole, so the game ball is continuously shot. Even so, the occurrence of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning hole is suppressed. For this reason, in a state in which the variable ball entry device is in an open state for a predetermined number of times with a period in which it is in a closed state (for example, a special game state advantageous to the player), technical operations such as so-called stopping shots are performed. It is possible to reduce (virtually eliminate) the difference in game balls obtained between a player who performs the technical operation and a player who does not perform the technical operation.

Means C-2. The ball-entering opportunity granting means moves the game ball in contact with the shutter at the closed position a distance longer than the width of the shutter in the longitudinal direction while maintaining the state of contact with the shutter. The gaming machine according to means C-1, characterized by:

According to means C-2, when the shutter is at the open position, the state in which the game ball can enter the specific winning hole can be maintained for as long as possible. Therefore, during a period in which the variable ball-entering device is in the open state a plurality of times, even if the game ball is launched at such timing that it reaches the variable ball-entering device when the variable ball-entering device is in the closed state, When the variable ball-entering device is opened, the game ball immediately moves to a position where it can enter the variable ball-entering device, but stays within that range as much as possible, and the variable ball-entering device is next opened. You can wait for the timing to be done. As a result, the effect of increasing the possibility of a ball entering the variable ball-entering device can be achieved more reliably.

For example, "at least the shutter at the closed position extends back and forth and is configured to allow a game ball to be placed on the upper surface thereof, and the ball-entering opportunity providing means places the game ball on the upper surface of the shutter, moving a distance longer than the width of the shutter in the longitudinal direction (for example, meandering) on the upper surface of the shutter.

It should be noted that it is also possible to ``form small irregularities on the upper surface of the shutter as the ball-entering opportunity granting means''. In this case, when the shutter is at the open position, the effect of keeping the state in which the ball can be entered into the specific winning hole for as long as possible is surely achieved. In addition, for example, the upper surface of the shutter is formed in a substantially circular arc shape with a low center and high left and right sides, so that a game ball placed on the shutter rolls back and forth to the left and right, and falls from the shutter when the momentum weakens. may

Means C-3. The shutter protrudes into the game area and extends in the front-rear direction above the specific prize winning opening, and the open position fully or mostly exits the game area and opens the specific winning opening upward. It is configured to be slidable back and forth between
Means C-1 or C- characterized in that, when the shutter is in the open position, a game ball resting on the upper surface of the shutter enters the specific winning hole. 2. The gaming machine described in 2.

According to the means C-3, when the variable ball entry device is closed, game balls are placed (stored) on the upper surface of the shutter, and when the variable ball entry device is opened, the shutter loses its support. When the game ball falls downward, it enters a specific winning hole. For this reason, for example, the movement and reaction of the game ball until it enters the specific winning hole is faster than when the shutter extends vertically and moves the game ball backward to enter the specific winning hole. Become. Therefore, by moving the shutter from the closed position to the open position, it is possible to cause the game ball, which has been restricted from entering the specific winning hole by the shutter, to enter the specific winning hole relatively quickly.

In addition, for example, when the shutter extending back and forth is rotated upward to open the specific winning hole, the game ball thought to have entered the specific winning hole is thrown to the outside by the shutter. Such situations can be avoided. Furthermore, for example, in a structure in which a shutter extending back and forth is rotated downward to open a specific winning hole, it is not the timing for the shutter to open due to the weight or impact of a large amount of game balls falling on the shutter at once. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is released to a specific winning hole and enters the specific winning hole.

It should be noted that "the shutter has a configuration in which the longitudinal direction is the left-right direction, and the ball-entering opportunity providing means moves the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter with respect to the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular shutter. while meandering in a direction intersecting with the shutter, toward the downstream side in the longitudinal direction of the shutter by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter. In general, the front-to-rear width of the game area defined by the game board and the transparent plate-like body arranged in front thereof is narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball. For this reason, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is meandered in a direction intersecting the short side direction of the substantially rectangular shutter, or from the center side to the outer peripheral side of the substantially circular shutter. If an attempt is made to move a distance longer than the width of the shutter in the longitudinal direction while turning toward the shutter, the front-rear width of the shutter must be made wider than the front-rear width of the game area, and the game ball moving on the shutter must be displaced. There is a risk that a point behind the front of the game board will have to be selected as a suitable starting point. In this case, there is a possibility that the configuration may become complicated. In this regard, if the game ball resting on the upper surface of the shutter meanders in a direction crossing the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular shutter, the front-rear width of the shutter should be wider than the front-rear width of the game area. Even without it, the game ball placed on the shutter can be moved a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter. Therefore, such problems can be eliminated.

Means C-4. The gaming machine according to means C-3, wherein the ball-entering opportunity granting means is formed by forming unevenness on the upper surface of the shutter.

For example, instead of forming unevenness on the shutter side, the ball-entering opportunity granting means is configured by forming a projection projecting inwardly from the peripheral edge of the opening of the specific prize winning opening above the shutter in the closed position. However, when the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is guided by the protrusion and is moved while meandering, even if the shutter is displaced to the open position, the protrusion is inside from the opening peripheral edge of the specific winning hole. Since it remains in the state of protruding to the circumferential side, there is a possibility that the ease of entering the game ball into the specific winning hole may be reduced.

In this regard, as in this means C-4, if the shutter is displaced to the open position by forming the unevenness that constitutes the ball-entering opportunity granting means on the shutter side, the ball-entering chance granting means will also be fully or Since most of them leave the game area, it is possible to eliminate such a problem.

Means C-5. The variable ball entry device includes a substantially plate-shaped base plate attached to the game board,
The base plate is formed with an accommodation opening for retracting the shutter,
A portion of the front surface of the base plate above the accommodation opening is inclined rearward upward,
The game machine according to means C-4, wherein the game ball moving on the upper surface of the shutter is configured so as to be able to come into contact with a portion below the center of the game ball.

In the case where the shutter extends back and forth and is configured to be displaceable back and forth as in the above means C-3, and when unevenness is formed on the upper surface of the shutter as in the above means C-4, When the shutter is pulled toward the game board to the open position, there is a concern that the game ball on the shutter will be pressed by the protrusion on the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate, and will be bounced by the force. be.

In this respect, according to means C-5, when the shutter is set to the open position, it is assumed that the game ball on the shutter is at a position where it is likely to be caught between the protrusion on the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate. Also, the game ball is tilted rearward upward and is in contact with the part below the central part of the game ball so that the game ball is placed on the upper part of the accommodation opening of the base plate, so that the shutter can be released relatively smoothly. The convex part can be climbed over to the specific prize winning opening side. Therefore, when the shutter is set to the open position, the game ball on the shutter can be more reliably entered into the specific winning opening, and damage to the variable ball entry device and the like can be suppressed.

Means C-6. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-5, further comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter is displaced to the closed position. .

According to the means C-6, the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower side of the game ball when it is in the closed position is likely to be subjected to a relatively large load, but the receiver that supports the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter. By providing the member, it is possible to reduce the load on the root side of the shutter and prevent the shutter from breaking at the root side.

It should be noted that "a rib is formed on the rear surface side of the shutter". In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the game ball collides with the shutter. Further, it is also possible to provide "a cushioning material in the shutter or in a member that abuts and supports the shutter in the closed position". In this case, it is possible to reduce the shock when the shutter receives a game ball, and to suppress damage and collision noise.

Means C-7. normal starting means configured to allow passage of game balls moving in the game area;
a special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
variable winning means capable of changing between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
normal starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means;
a special starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special starting means;
variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery to determine whether or not to open the special starting means based on the detection by the normal start detection means;
a winning lottery execution means for performing a lottery lottery as to whether or not the variable winning means is to be opened based on the detection by the special start detection means;
The variable winning device constitutes the variable winning device,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-6, wherein the variable winning means is arranged downstream of the special starting means in the game area.

As in the above means C-3, the shutter in the closed position needs to catch the game balls that have fallen, and the burden at that time is heavy. In this respect, as in the present means C-7, by arranging the variable winning means as a variable ball entry device downstream of the special starting means, the ball entering the special starting means is directed to the variable winning means. The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

Means C-8. normal starting means configured to allow passage of game balls moving in the game area;
a special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
variable winning means capable of changing between an open state in which a moving game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
normal starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal starting means;
a special starting detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special starting means;
variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
support lottery execution means for performing a ball entry support lottery to determine whether or not to open the special starting means based on the detection by the normal start detection means;
a winning lottery execution means for performing a lottery lottery as to whether or not the variable winning means is to be opened based on the detection by the special start detection means;
The variable ball entry device is configured by the special starting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-6, wherein the variable winning means is arranged upstream of the special starting means in the game area.

The shutter in the closed position needs to catch the game ball that has fallen, and the burden is heavy at that time. In this respect, like this means C-8, by arranging the special starting means as a variable ball entry device on the downstream side of the variable winning means, the amount of ball entering the variable winning means is directed toward the special starting means. The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

Means C-9. A gaming machine according to either means C-1 or C-8, characterized in that rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of game balls is provided on the upstream side of the variable ball entry device.

According to the means C-9, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball entering the variable ball entering device are adjusted by providing the straightening means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball before reaching the variable ball entering device. can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress variations in the point of falling onto the shutter, that is, the starting point of the game ball moving while contacting the shutter. Furthermore, variation in the initial velocity of the game ball moving while contacting the shutter can be suppressed. Therefore, the time for which the game ball moves while being in contact with the shutter is lengthened as much as possible, and the above-described effect of improving the probability of the ball entering the specific winning hole is further achieved.

It should be noted that "the straightening means may guide the game ball to an upstream portion of the shutter". Further, the rectifying means may be configured with accessories, may be configured with nails, or may be a combination of a plurality of configurations.

Means C-10. The shutter
a first shutter extending back and forth at least in the closed position and capable of closing the specific winning opening;
A second shutter that extends back and forth at least in the closed position and is arranged above the first shutter at a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball from the first shutter,
The first shutter and the second shutter are configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position at the same time,
The game ball that has fallen on the second shutter in the closed position moves on the second shutter, falls on the first shutter in the closed position, moves on the first shutter,
When the first shutter and the second shutter in the closed position are displaced to the open position, the game ball resting on the first shutter and the second shutter enters the specific winning hole. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-9, characterized by:

According to the means C-10, the position and speed of the game ball falling on the first shutter can be limited to some extent by the second shutter, and the movement of the game ball on the first shutter can be made suitable. . Further, not only the game ball resting on the first shutter in the closed position but also the game ball resting on the second shutter in the closed position are displaced to the open position. Since the ball enters the specific winning hole, the effect of efficiently entering the game ball into the specific winning hole can be achieved more reliably.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

A. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A pinball game machine provided with a game area in which a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

B. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine having a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) that guides the game balls and extends along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation port, etc.), and configured to enable visual recognition of the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area.

C. The game machine or each pinball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

10 Pachinko machine 32a First variable winning device 32b Second variable winning device 33a First starting winning device 33b Second starting winning device 34 Through gate 42 Decoration pattern display device 43L 1st special display device 43R 2nd special display device 46 Hold lamp 223a, 223b Count switch 224a, 224b Starting winning switch 225 Through gate switch 261 Main controller 262 Sub Control device.

Claims (1)

a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
A ball entry means that changes between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter,
The ball entry means
a specific prize winning opening into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific winning hole;
A closed position in which entry of a game ball into the specific winning opening is disabled and the ball entry means is in the closed state; a shutter that can be displaced between the open position and the open state,
A specific ball entry route is provided for guiding game balls moving in the game area to the specific winning opening,
When a game ball moving in the game area enters the entrance of the specific ball entry route, the game ball is guided to the ball entry means,
When the shutter is in the closed position when the game ball reaches the ball entry means, the shutter in the closed position restricts the game ball from entering the specific winning hole, A game ball is guided to the exit side of the specific ball entry route by the shutter in the closed position,
When the shutter is in the open position when the game ball reaches the ball entry means, and the game ball is guided to the exit side of the specific ball entry route by the shutter in the closed position. When the shutter is set to the open position in the state, the game ball enters the specific winning hole,
When the shutter is not set to the open position in a state where the game ball is guided to the exit side of the specific ball entry route by the shutter in the closed position, the game ball does not reach the exit of the specific ball entry route. discharged from
The shutter is configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position by being displaced in the front-rear direction. When the shutter is at the open position, the game ball guided to the exit side of the specific ball entry route by the upper surface of the shutter is displaced downward and enters the specific winning opening. is a ball configuration,
The shutter
The game ball enters the entrance of the specific ball entry route and is configured to be able to guide the game ball in a direction away from the exit of the specific ball entry route according to the direction of movement of the game ball that has reached the ball entry means. 1 counterpart;
a second corresponding portion that guides the game ball that has moved through the first corresponding portion and guides the game ball to the exit side of the specific ball entry route;
A gaming machine, wherein at least part of the first corresponding portion overlaps with the second corresponding portion.

Images